Home

KEI 2010 User

1. NOTE You can only scan consecutive channels Skipping channels is not allowed For example 1 4 is valid 1 2 4 is not valid See the instruction manual of the internal scanner card for details on scanning 5 36 SCPI Command Reference EXTernal lt list gt ROUTe SCAN EXTernal lt list gt Define external scan list Parameter lt list gt scanlist where scanlist is the specified list of external channels 1 to 800 to be scanned Query EXTernal Query programmed scan list Description The Model 2010 can operate with an external switch system such as the Keithley Model 7001 or 7002 The Model 2010 can measure up to 800 channels that are switched by the external switching system This command is used to define the external scan list The scan list can contain 2 to 800 channels See SCAN INTernal for examples to express a scan list The external scan is enabled by the ROUTe SCAN LSELect EXTernal command LSELect lt name gt sROUTe SCAN LSELect lt name gt Perform specified scan operation Parameters lt name gt INTernal Enable scan for internal scanner card EXTernal Enable scan for external scanner card NONE Disable all scan operations Query LSELect Query scan operation Description This command is used to select and perform the desired scan operation When INTernal is selected the Model 2010 scans the channels of the internal switching card according to how the scan is configured see SCAN INTer
2. Value 1 Operation Event Set Events Idle Idle state of the 2010 0 Operation Event Cleared Trig Triggering Meas Measuring 5 58 SCPI Command Reference ENABle command ENABle lt NRf gt STATus MEASurement ENABle lt NRf gt Program Measurement Event Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt NRf gt Program Questionable Event Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle lt NRf gt Program Operation Event Enable Register Parameters lt NRf gt 0 Clear register lt NRf gt 128 Set bit B7 1 Set bit BO 256 Set bit B8 2 Set bit B1 512 Set bit B9 4 Set bit B2 1024 Set bit B10 16 Set bit B4 16384 Set bit B14 32 Set bit B5 65535 Set all bits 64 Set bit B6 Query ENABle Query enable register Description These commands are used to set the contents of the event enable registers see Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 and Figure 5 9 An ENABle command is sent with the decimal equivalent of the binary value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the appropriate register Each event enable register is used as a mask for events see EVENt for descriptions of events When a bit in an event enable register is cleared 0 the corresponding bit in the event register is masked and thus cannot set the corresponding summary bit of the next register set in the status structure Conversely when a bit in an event enable register is set 1 the corresponding bit in the event register is unmasked When the unma
3. DCIRcuit command DCIRcuit lt b gt SENSe 1 FRESistance DCIRcuit lt b gt Toggle dry circuit low voltage ohms Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable dry circuit low voltage ohms 0 or OFF Disable dry circuit low voltage ohms Query DCIRcuit Query status of dry circuit low voltage ohms Description This command is used to enable and disable dry circuit low voltage ohms for low resistance measurements Dry circuit testing limits the voltage across a component under test to 20mV or less This low voltage prevents the puncturing of oxidation on switches and relay contacts Dry circuit ohms is supported only for the 10 and 100 ohm ranges of 4W ohms OCOMpensated command OCOMpensated lt b gt SENSe 1 RESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt Toggle offset compensation SENSe 1 FRESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt Toggle offset compensation Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable offset compensation 0 or OFF Disable offset compensation Query OCOMpensated Query status of offset compensation Description These commands are used to enable and disable offset compensation for two wire RES and four wire FRES low resistance measurements Offset compensation is used to cancel the effects of offset voltages such as thermal EMFs when making resistance measurements Although measurements can be made on any valid resistance range up to and including 100MQ offset compensation only has an effect on the 10kQ and below ranges 5 46 SCP
4. Front panel summary The front panel of the Model 2010 is shown in Figure 2 1 This figure includes important abbreviated information that should be reviewed before operating the instrument Figure 2 1 Model 2010 front panel KEITHLEY 2010 MULTIMETER MX B o PERIOD SENSOR RANGE DELAY _ HOLD LIMITS _ ON OFF TYPE RATIO DRYCKT_OCOMP A eme Coa G G CD SAVE SETUP CONFIG_HALT GPIB RS232 CAL TEST RANGE OPEN CLOSE STEP SCAN DIGITS RATE EXIT ENTER 1 Function keys shifted and unshifted Select measurement function DC and AC voltage DC and AC current two wire and four wire resistance frequency period temperature with thermocouples or four wire RTDs math function mX b dBm dB or special function continuity diode test 2 Operation keys EXTRIG TRIG STORE RECALL FILTER REL lt q and gt OPEN CLOSE STEP SCAN DIGITS RATE EXIT ENTER SHIFT LOCAL Selects external triggers front panel bus trigger link as the trigger source Triggers a measurement from the front panel Enables reading storage Displays stored readings and buffer statistics maximum minimum average standard deviation Use A and to scroll through buffer use lt q and to toggle between reading number and reading Displays digital filter status for present function and toggles filter on off Enables disables relative reading on present function Moves through selections within functions and operations If
5. NOTE See the previous discussion about crest factor in Measuring voltage of this section Connections Assuming factory default conditions the basic procedure is 1 Connect test leads to the AMPS and INPUT LO terminals The front inputs must be used place the INPUTS button in the FRONT position 2 Select the measurement function by pressing DCI or ACI 3 Pressing AUTO toggles autoranging Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed with autoranging If you want manual ranging use the RANGE A and YW keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected current 4 Connect test leads to the source as shown in Figure 2 5 CAUTION Do not apply more than 3A 250V to the input or the AMPS fuse will open circuit 5 Observe the display If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until an on scale reading is displayed or press AUTO for autoranging Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 6 Take readings from the display Figure 2 5 Model 2010 DC and AC current measurements EEIT Current eeeeeceeee 4 6 So rce e 2 gt 2 2a E a SD aD a 7 Caution Maximum Input 3A DC or RMS Basic Measurements 2 23 AMPS fuse replacement WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the power line and other equipment before replacing the AMPS fuse 1 Turn off the power and disconnect the power line and test leads From the front panel gently push in the AMPS
6. ccccceeeseceeseeeeseeeesseeessseeeesseeesaes 5 58 CONDition command sseseoseseeeeesessessosssseeserersresssresssree 5 60 SPRESet command ssssrcsnreresirorr aseeni eE r RR 5 60 QUE e Commands sorcisti r 5 61 SS YS Tem SUDSYStEM oncs ssassn eraasi 5 64 BEEPer Command 5 5 scssiccissidesct i re ees 5 64 sPRESet COMMANA eeesceesssscesseceesneeeesseeessseeeesseeesaes 5 64 KCLick command sincsen aa 5 64 POSetup lt name gt command s sseessseseeseeresesreresrreessrsrrsreee 5 65 VERSion command sssssssricereissiscrsescesisrireirersreirsrerssnes 5 65 TERRor COMMANA ceeccecsssecesseeesseeessseeeesseeeesseeesaes 5 66 AZERo commands ccceceeesesesssssscececeeeeececsceeesseeesesenens 5 67 CiL Bar Commands ccc ccdisccisss cies veaavieddecsuecaasesdeceenisestvetsevens 5 67 KEY lt NRf gt command 2 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 68 RS 232 interface commands 0 00 eeseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 5 70 Line frequency QUCTY oe eeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeneeeaes 5 70 STRACE SUDSYSLOM i 2 cccsecicdscecd ase a naaar 5 71 CL Ear command sssusa nnes ae 5 71 SFREE command sssnsenireriiotinssiiiiiisiie ia 5 71 SPOINTS command oseiro yene eti 5 71 FEED command cioinn 5 72 DATA command sassecisesicsccesseescedseadsscasiecaoaz ssdansbesayecbasens 5 72 Trigger SuDSYStem oesrirssieiyiensciiiisii iaa 5 73 TINT Tiate commands sssissrescesiicerisciisecseisseersisatsseresiseess 5 73 ABORt command
7. idle LINE INPUT 2 a Read the reading PRINT a Display the reading 5 SCPI Command Reference 5 2 SCPI Command Reference This section contains reference information on programming the Model 2010 with the SCPI commands It is organized as follows SCPI signal oriented measurement commands Covers the signal oriented measurement commands These commands are used to acquire readings SCPI command subsystems reference tables Includes a summary table for each SCPI subsystem command SCPI command subsystems Includes additional information on each SCPI subsystem command SCPI signal oriented measurement commands The signal oriented measurement commands are used to acquire readings You can use these high level instructions to control the measurement process These commands are summarized in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Signal oriented measurement command summary Command Description CONFigure lt function gt Places the Model 2010 in a one shot measurement mode for the specified function FETCh Requests the latest reading READ Performs an ABORt INITiate and a FETCh MEASure lt function gt Performs an ABORt CONFigure lt function gt and a READ COMNFigure Command CONFigure lt function gt lt function gt CURRent AC AC current CURRent DC DC current VOLTage AC AC voltage VOLTage DC DC voltage RESistance Two wire resistance FRESistance Four
8. 1 1 Bo 1 a 17 18 100mA and 1A Dry Circuit function add 40ppm Speeds include measurement and binary data transfer out the GPIB Speeds are for 60Hz 50Hz operation using factory default operating conditions RST Autorange off Display off Trigger delay 0 Sample count 1024 auto zero off Auto zero off NPLC 0 01 Ohms 17 15 readings second 1 PLC 16 67ms 60Hz 20ms 50Hz 400Hz The frequency is automatically determined at power up For signal levels gt 500V add 0 02ppm V uncertainty for the portion exceeding 500V Add 120ms for ohms 10 Must have 10 matching of lead resistance in Input HI and LO For line frequency 0 1 12 Relative to calibration accuracy Specifications are for 4 wire ohms For 2 wire ohms add 1Q to ppm of range uncertainty 10Q For 1kQ unbalance in LO lead range is for 4 wire only Offset compensation on 16 Sense LO input must be referenced to Input LO Sense HI input must not exceed 125 referenced to Input LO of range selected Sense input has 100mV 1V and 10V ranges When properly zeroed using REL function For rear inputs add the following to Temperature Coefficient ppm of reading uncertainty IMQ 25ppm 10MQ 250ppm 100MQ 2500ppm Operating environment specified for 0 C to 50 C and 50 RH at 35 C HW 9 5 03 Rev C 2010 Low Noise Multimeter TRUE RMS AC VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS ACCURACY
9. Description This command is used to specify the units for temperature measurements SCPI Command Reference 5 77 VOLTage commands AC lt name gt UNIT VOLTage AC lt name gt Specify ACV units Parameters lt name gt V AC voltage measurement units DB dB AC voltage measurement units DBM dBm AC voltage measurement units Query AC Query AC voltage units Description This command is used to select the units for ACV measurements With volt V units selected normal AC voltage measurements are made for the ACV function With DB units selected AC dB voltage measurements are performed The DBM units selection is used to make decibel measurements referenced to lmW dB and dBm measurements are explained further in Section 2 DB REFerence lt n gt UNIT VOLTage AC DB REFerence lt n gt Specify dBm reference Parameter lt n gt le 7 to 1000 Specify reference in volts Query REFerence Description This command is used to specify the dB reference level When DB units is selected VOLTage AC DB ACV dB measurements are made using the specified dB reference level The reference level is specified in volts and is not range dependent For example a dB reference level of 1 is 1V on all ACV measurement ranges DBM IMPedance lt n gt UNIT VOLTage AC DBM IMPedance lt n gt Specify dB reference Parameter lt n gt 1 to 9999 Specify reference impedance Query IMPedance Description This command is used to specify the dBm r
10. B3 B2 B1 BO Register lt _ Read by STB OR SRE OSB ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB Service SRE B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Request Enable Register OSB Operation Summary Bit MSS Master Summary Status RQS Request for Service ESB Event Summary Bit MAV Message Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit amp Logical AND OR Logical OR Status Byte Register The summary messages from the status registers and queues are used to set or clear the appropriate bits B0 B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register These bits do not latch and their states 0 or 1 are solely dependent on the summary messages 0 or 1 For example if the Standard Event Status Register is read its register will clear As a result its summary message will reset to 0 which in turn will clear the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register Bit B6 in the Status Byte Register is one of the following The Master Summary Status MSS bit sent in response to the STB command indicates the status of any set bits with corresponding enable bits set The Request for Service RQS bit sent in response to a serial poll indicates which device was requesting service by pulling on the SRQ line 4 22 Remote Operation For a description
11. CALL SEND 16 rout clos 1 read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading Close channel 2 take AC voltage reading CALL SEND 16 func volts ac status CALL SEND 16 rout clos 2 read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading Close channel 3 take ohms reading CALL SEND 16 func res status CALL SEND 16 rout clos 3 read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading C 10 Example Programs The following example program sets up the Model 2010 using a scan list to measure DC voltage on channels 1 2 and 3 The meter takes ten sets of readings with each set spaced 15 seconds apart and each of the three readings in each group taken as fast as possible The Model 2010 stores the readings in the buffer and asserts SRQ when the buffer is full The program waits for the SRQ and then reads the readings from the buffer Example program to demonstrate using the scan list For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls and put trigger model in IDLE state set function to DCV CALL SEND 16 rst status Reset STATus subsystem not affected by
12. Description This command is used to specify the format for the CALC1 math calculations With NONE selected no CALC1 calculation is performed With MXB or PERCent selected and enabled see STATe the result of the calculation is displayed The calculated reading is refreshed each time the instrument takes a reading KMATh commands MMFactor lt Nrf gt CALCulate 1 KMATh MMFactor lt NRf gt Specify m factor Parameter lt NRf gt 100e6 to 100e6 Query MMFactor Query m factor Description This command is used to define the m factor for the mx b calculation MBFactor lt NRf gt CALCulate 1 KMATh MBFactor lt NRf gt Specify b factor Parameter lt NRf gt 100e6 to 100e6 Query MBFactor Query b factor Description This command is used to define the b factor for the mx b calculation MUNits CALCulate 1 KMATh MUNits lt name gt Specify units for mx b Parameter lt name gt 2 characters using A through Z Query MUNits Query units for mx b Description This command is used to specify the units data element for the mx b calculation Use any two letters from A through Z PERCent lt NRf gt CALCulate 1 KMATh PERCent lt NRf gt Specify target value for percent calculation Parameter lt NRf gt le8 to 1e8 Specify target value Query PERCENt Query percent target value Description This command is used to specify the target value for the percent calcu
13. ELEMents Query data elements BORDer lt name gt Select binary byte order NORMal or SWAPped SWAPped V BORDer Query byte order y Table 5 5 ROUTe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter ROUTe Commands to control scanner card CLOSe lt chan num gt Close specified channel 1 to 10 or channel pair 1 to 5 STATe Query closed channel or channel pair OPEN ALL Open all input channels 1 through 10 MULTiple Path to close and open multiple channels CLOSe lt list gt Close specified channels 1 to 11 STATe Query closed channel OPEN lt list gt Open specified channels 1 to 11 SCAN Path to scan channels V INTernal lt list gt Specify internal scan list 2 to 10 channels 1 10 y INTernal Query internal scan list y EXTernal lt list gt Specify external scan list 2 to 800 channels 1 10 EXTernal Query external scan list LSELect lt name gt Select scan operation INTernal EXTernal or NONE NONE LSELect Query scan operation 5 10 SCPI Command Reference Table 5 6 SENSe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter SENSe 1 FUNCtion lt name gt Select measurement function VOLTage AC VOLTage VOLT DC V DC RESistance FRESistance CURRent AC CURRent DC FREQuency TEMPerature PERiod DIODe CONTinuity FUNCtion Query function V DATA Retu
14. ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB Decimal Weighting 128 32 16 8 4 1 27 e5 e9 3 2 20 Value Value 1 Enable Service Request Events OSB Operation Summary Bit Event ESB Event Summary Bit 0 Disable Mask Service MAV Message Available Request Event QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit 4 44 Remote Operation STB Status Byte Query Read status byte register Description Use the STB query command to acquire the value in decimal of the Status Byte Register The Status Byte Register is shown in Figure 4 16 The binary equivalent of the decimal value determines which bits in the register are set All bits except Bit B6 in this register are set by other event registers and queues Bit 6 sets when one or more enabled conditions occur The STB query command does not clear the status byte register This register can only be cleared by clearing the related registers and queues For example for an acquired decimal value of 48 the binary equivalent is 00110000 This binary value indicates that bits 4 and 5 if the Status Byte Register are set The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows Bit 0 Measurement Status MSB A set bit indicates that a measurement event has occurred The event can be identified by reading the Measurement Event Status Register using the STATus MEASurement command see Sect
15. TEMPerature TCouple TYPE lt name gt Specify TC type Parameters lt name gt J Set operation for Type J thermocouples K Set operation for Type K thermocouples N Set operation for Type N thermocouples T Set operation for Type T thermocouples Query TYPE Query thermocouple type Description This command is used to configure the Model 2010 for the thermocouple type that you are using to make temperature measurements These commands are used to configure the reference junction for thermocouple temperature measurements RSELect lt name gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction 1 RSELect lt name gt Specify reference junction type Parameters lt name gt SIMulated Use simulated temperature as reference REAL Use a measured temperature as reference Query RSELect Query reference junction type Description This command is used to specify the type of reference junction that is going to be used for thermocouple temperature measurements Specify REAL if you are using an actual reference junction The REAL command is then used to specify the desired reference temperature Specify SIMulated if you wish to use a simulated reference temperature The SIMulated command is then used to specify the desired simulated reference temperature SIMulated lt n gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction 1 SIMulated lt n gt Parameters lt n gt 0 to 50 Specify temperature in C 32 to 122 Specify temperature in F 273 to 323 Specify temperat
16. TIMER OFF RDG CNT gt 0002 STEP STEP STEP 10 channel closures 20 channel closures 2 channel closures 10 output triggers 20 output triggers 2 output triggers SCAN SCAN SCAN 10 channel closures 10 channel closures x2 10 channel closures 1 output triggers 2 output triggers 1 output triggers RECALL RECALL RECALL 10 Readings 20 Readings 2 Readings e With a reading count 0010 equal to the scan list length 10 a step operation Measurement Options 3 25 consecutively closes ten channels and sends an output trigger after each channel A scan operation also consecutively closes ten channels but sends an output trigger only at the end of the scan e With a reading count 0020 greater than the scan list length 10 stepping yields 20 channel closures and 20 output triggers Scanning also goes through the scan list twice but sends an output trigger only at the end of each scan e With a reading count 0002 less than the scan list length 10 stepping yields two channel closures and output triggers Scanning goes through the entire scan list and sends an output trigger but only two readings are stored NOTE Ifthe reading count divided by the scan list length is not an integer it is rounded up For example if the reading count is 15 and the scan list length is 10 there will be two output triggers for scanning The differences between stepping and sc
17. enable BFL CALL SEND 16 sre 1 status enable MSB CALL SEND 16 trac feed cont next status Start everything CALL SEND 16 init status WaitSRQ IF NOT srq THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SPOLL 16 poll status IF poll AND 64 0 THEN GOTO WaitSRQ After the program has detected an asserted SRQ line it serial polls the Model 2010 to determine if it is the device requesting service This is necessary for two reasons e Serial polling the Model 2010 causes it to stop asserting the SRQ line e In test systems that have more than one IEEE 488 instrument programmed to assert SRQ your program must determine which instrument is actually requesting service Once an event register has caused a service request it cannot cause another service request until you clear it by reading it in this case using STATus MEASurement EVENt or by sending the CLS command C 6 Example Programs Storing readings in buffer The reading buffer in the Model 2010 is flexible and capable It has three controls which are found in the TRACe subsystem There are commands to control The size of the buffer in readings TRACe POINts lt NRf gt e Where the data is coming from before or after the CALCulate math post processing TRACe FEED SENSe1 store unprocessed readings TRACe FEED CALCulatel store math processed readings e Select buffer control mode TRACe FEED CONTrol NEVer immediately stop storing readings TRACe FEED
18. lt n gt Select range 0 to 101e6 100e6 y UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO Query auto range y REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 0 to 101e6 0 y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe Query state of reference y ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value y DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 8 8 DIGits Query resolution AVERage Path to configure and control filter TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note TCONtrol Query filter type COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter OFF STATe Query state of digital filter SCPI Command Reference 5 15 Table 5 6 cont SENSe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter SENSe 1 FRESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt Enable or disable offset compensation OFF y OCOMpensated Query offset compensation y DCIRcuit lt b gt Enable or disable dry circuit ohms OFF DCIRcuit Query dry circuit ohms TEMPerature Path to configure temperature NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate line cycles 0 01 to 10 1 NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 200 to 1372 0 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF STATe Query state of reference ACQuire Use inpu
19. stat oper stat oper enab lt NRf gt When the above is sent the first command word is recognized as the root command stat When the next colon is detected the path pointer moves down to the next command level and executes the command When the path pointer sees the colon after the semicolon it resets back to the root level and starts over Commands that are on the same command level can be executed without having to retype the entire command path Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt enab After the first command enab is executed the path pointer is at the third command level in the structure Since enab is also on the third level it can be entered without repeating the entire path name Notice that the leading colon for enab is not included in the program message If a colon were included the path pointer would reset to the root level and expect a root command Since enab is not a root command an error would occur 4 32 Remote Operation Command path rules Each new program message must begin with the root command unless it is optional e g SSENSe If the root is optional simply treat a command word on the next level as the root The colon at the beginning of a program message is optional and need not be used Stat pres Sstat pres e When the path pointer detects a colon it moves down to the next command level An exception is when the path pointer detects a semicolon which
20. B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Event Warn Cal Temp Decimal Weighting 16384 256 16 214 2 24 Value 0 0 1 0 1 Ea 0 1 Value 1 Enable Questionable Event 0 Disable Mask Questionable Event Events Warn Command Warning Cal Calibration Summary Temp Temperature Summary Bit Position B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Event Idle Trig Meas Decimal Weighting 1024 32 16 210 25 24 Value ee A 01 01 Value 1 Enable Operation Event Events Idle Idle state of the 2010 0 Disable Mask Operation Event Trig Triggering Meas Measuring 5 60 SCPI Command Reference CONDition command CONDition STATus MEASurement CONDition Read Measurement Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition Read Questionable Condition Register STATus OPERation CONDition Read Operation Condition Register Description These query commands are used to read the contents of the condition PRESet command PRESet STATus PRESet Description registers Each set of event registers except the Standard Event register set has a condition register A condition register is similar to its corresponding event register except that it is a real time register that constantly updates to ref
21. IEEE 488 connector a 3 HAA ne p gt To allow many parallel connections to one instrument stack the connector Two screws are located on each connector to ensure that connections remain secure Current standards call for metric threads which are identified with dark colored screws Earlier versions had different screws which were silver colored Do not use these types of connectors on the Model 2010 Multimeter because it is designed for metric threads Figure 4 3 shows a typical connecting scheme for a multi unit test system Remote Operation 4 9 Figure 4 3 Instrument Instrument Instrument IEEE 488 connections Controller To avoid possible mechanical damage stack no more than three connectors on any one unit NOTE To minimize interference caused by electromagnetic radiation use only shielded IEEE 488 cables Available shielded cables from Keithley are models 7007 1 and 7007 2 To connect the Model 2010 Multimeter to the IEEE 488 bus follow these steps 1 Line up the cable connector with the connector located on the rear panel The connector is designed so that it will fit only one way Figure 4 4 shows the location of the IEEE 488 connector Figure 4 4 IEEE 488 connector location 2 Tighten the screws securely making sure not to over tighten them 3 Connect any additional connectors from other instruments as required for your application 4 Make sure that the other end of th
22. Install the fuse holder assembly into the power module by pushing it in until it locks in place Table 2 1 Fuse ratings Line voltage Fuse rating Keithley P N 100 120V 0 25A slow blow 5x20mm FU 96 4 220 240V 0 125A slow blow 5x20mm FU 91 2 10 Basic Measurements Power up sequence On power up the Model 2010 performs self tests on its EPROM and RAM and momentarily lights all segments and annunciators If a failure is detected the instrument momentarily displays an error message and the ERR annunciator turns on Error messages are listed in Appendix B NOTE lfa problem develops while the instrument is under warranty return it to Keithley Instruments Inc for repair If the instrument passes the self tests the firmware revision levels are displayed An example of this display is REV A01 A02 where AOI is the main board ROM revision A02 is the display board ROM revision After the power up sequence the instrument begins its normal display of readings Basic Measurements 2 11 High energy circuit safety precautions To optimize safety when measuring voltage in high energy distribution circuits read and use the directions in the following warning WARNING Dangerous arcs of an explosive nature in a high energy circuit can cause severe personal injury or death If the multimeter is connected to a high energy circuit when set to a current range low resistance range or any other low impedance
23. Note that the commands assume address 16 which is the factory set address of the Model 2010 Multimeter PRINT 1 output 16 func volt ac func PRINT 1 enter 16 If you wish to display the response message on the CRT the computer will have to read the message and then print it to the CRT display as follows LINE INPUT 2 AS PRINT A The following programming example shows how all the above statements are used together The program fragment is shown in bold typeface OPEN ieee FOR OUTPUT AS 1 Open driver OPEN ieee FOR INPUT AS 2 Open driver PRINT 1 interm crlf CRLF terminator PRINT 1 output 16 func volt ac func Select ACV and query PRINT 1 enter 16 Get response message LINE INPUT 2 A Read response message PRINT A Display message 4 12 Remote Operation General Bus Commands Table 4 3 General Bus Commands and Associated Statements General commands are those commands such as DCL that have the same general meaning regardless of the instrument Table 4 3 lists the general bus commands along with the programming statement for each command which use the Keithley KPC 488 2 IEEE interface and the HP style Universal Language Driver Note that the commands requiring that the primary address be specified assume that the address is the factory set address of 16 General bus commands and associated statements Command Programming statement Effect on Model
24. PRINT 1 enter 02 Get response from 2010 DATA CALCulate2 DATA Read CALC2 result Description This query command is used to read the result of the CALC2 calculation If CALC2 is disabled or NONE is selected the raw reading will be read 5 24 SCPI Command Reference CALCulate3 These commands are used to configure and control the CALC3 limit test DATA lt n gt CALCulate3 LIMit 1 UPPer DATA lt n gt CALCulate3 LIMit 1 LOWer DATA lt n gt CALCulate3 LIMit2 UPPer DATA lt n gt CALCulate3 LIMit2 LOWer DATA lt n gt lt n gt 100e6 to 100e6 DEFault Specify upper limit1 Specify lower limit1 Specify upper limit2 Specify lower limit2 Parameters Specify limit value Set specified upper limit to 1 Set specified lower limit to 1 Set specified upper limit2 to 2 Set specified lower limit2 to 2 Set specified limit to 100e6 Set specified limit to 100e6 MINimum MAXimum UPPer DATA LOWer DATA Query upper limit value Query lower limit value Query Description This command is used to specify the upper and lower limit for LIMIT1 or LIMIT2 The actual limit depends on which measurement function is presently selected For example a limit value of 1 is 1V for the volts functions DCV or ACV 1A for the current functions DCI or ACI 1Q on the ohms functions 2 or 4 and 1 C F or K for the temperature function TEMP A limit value is not range sensitive A limit
25. QUEue Path to access error queue y NEXT Read the most recent error message Note 4 y ENABle lt list gt Specify error and status messages for queue Note 5 y ENABle Read the enabled messages y DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in queue Note 5 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clears all messages from Error Queue Notes 1 2 3 Error Queue Commands in this subsystem are not affected by RST and SYSTem PRESet The effects of cycling power CLS and STATus PRESet are explained by the following notes Event Registers Power up and CLS Clears all bits of the registers STATus PRESet No effect Enable Registers Power up and STATus PRESet Clears all bits of the registers CLS No effect Power up and CLS Clears the Error Queue STATus PRESet No effect Enable Disable Error Queue Messages Power up Clears list of messages CLS and STATus PRESet No effect 5 18 SCPI Command Reference Table 5 8 SYSTem command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter SYSTem PRESet Return to SYST PRES defaults y POSetup lt name gt Select power on setup RST PRESet or SAVO POSetup Query power on setup FRSWitch Query INPUTS switch 0 rear 1 front VERSion Query rev level of SCPI standard V ERRor Query read Error Queue Note y AZERo Path to set up autozero STATe lt b gt Enabl
26. RST CALL SEND 16 Sstat pres cls status CALL SEND 16 Sstat meas enab 512 status enable BFL CALL SEND 16 sre 1 status enable MSB Example Programs RST sets TRIG SOUR to IMM CALL SEND 16 samp coun 3 status CALL SEND 16 trig sour tim tim 15 status CALL SEND 16 trig coun 10 status TRACe subsystem is not affected by RST CALL SEND 16 trac poin 30 status CALL SEND 16 trac feed sens1 feed cont next status Now the buffer is armed CALL SEND 16 rout scan 1 3 status CALL SEND 16 rout scan lsel int status Start everything CALL SEND 16 init status Initialize reading while the 2010 is busy taking readings reading SPACES 2500 WaitSRQ IF NOT srq THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SPOLL 16 poll status IF poll AND 64 0 THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SEND 16 Stat meas status CALL ENTER S length 16 status CALL SEND 16 form elem read unit status CALL SEND 16 trac data status CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading NOTE To repeat buffer storage send the following command and then repeat the steps following the Start everything comment in the above example CALL SEND 16 feed cont next status C 12 Example Programs Taking readings using the READ command This programming example demonstrates a simple method for taking and displaying on the computer CRT a specified number
27. SCAN commands sjoen a e 5 35 SENSe 1 subsystem nsenesesesessesserssesecessssreseeseresoeseresseseeaseas 5 37 SFUNCtion Command c ccecccccsscessseeeesseeeesseeeesseeeesenes 5 37 DATA Command ceeceesceeeesecesseeeessseeeesseeessseeeessaeeesaes 5 38 HOLD Command soene iaaea ea ESEE 5 39 Speed Commmands isscsciicsesdiascersscscesseasecaesseraesieessaeassesaies 5 40 TRANGe commands iani i 5 41 REFerence lt n gt commands cccesceessseeeesseeeesneeeeeees 5 43 SDCIR cuit COMMANA 2 0 00 eeessceesseeesseeeeeseneeesseeeeesneeessees 5 45 OCOMpensated commando eeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeaes 5 45 DIGits command o 5 cscicscdeed ie ehieeicenicee ete eeicy 5 46 AVERage commands 0 0 eeeeseeseeeeeeneeeeteseeesetseeneeeseeeaes 5 47 Bandwidth Command ccccecssscecssseeessseeeesseeeesseeessneees 5 48 THReshold commands ccsssccesssseeesseeeseseeeesseeesaes 5 49 STRANsducer commands cccescesssteeeesteeeeseeesseeeeeaes 5 49 Thermocouple commands 00 es eeceeeeeeeeeseseeseeeeeseeeaees 5 50 ERTD commands 2es2 ce2s ees 0hssaeestdieeeteseadedecnaceinteeseceeess 5 52 DIODe command 1 eeecceeeesecessseeesseeeesseeeesseeeessseesaes 5 53 CONTinuity command ssessssesesseeeserereseseeresreresresrrsrsrrsreee 5 54 STAT s s bsystem sersan rosers e resene sar ar a ana 5 54 SEVENt command esosesoseesseseseeeeeseesssenssernssorsssersssenss 5 54 ENABle command
28. Table 4 2 RS 232 connector pinout Pin number Description 1 no connection 2 TXD transmit data 3 RXD receive data 4 no connection 5 GND signal ground 6 no connection 7 CTS clear to send 8 RTS ready to send 9 no connection CTS and RTS signals are not used Error messages See Appendix B for RS 232 error messages 4 8 Remote Operation GPIB bus operation and reference Introduction The following paragraphs contain information about connecting to and using the GPIB IEEE 488 bus GPIB bus standards The GPIB bus is the IEEE 488 instrumentation data bus with hardware and programming standards originally adopted by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers in 1975 The Model 2010 multimeter conforms to these standards e TEEE 488 1987 1 JTEEE 488 1987 2 This standard defines a syntax for sending data to and from instruments how an instrument interprets this data what registers should exist to record the state of the instrument and a group of common commands e SCPI 1991 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This standard defines a command language protocol It goes one step farther than TEEE 488 1987 2 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of an instrument GPIB bus connections To connect the Model 2010 Multimeter to the GPIB bus use a cable equipped with standard TEEE 488 connectors as shown inFigure 4 2 Figure 4 2
29. measurements as well as the maximum signal that can be measured The range setting fixed or auto for each measurement function is saved when changing functions Maximum readings The full scale readings for every range on each function are 20 overrange except for the 1000VDC 750VAC 3ADC 3AAC 1MQ two wire and four wire and diode test ranges Input values more than the maximum readings cause the OVERFLOW message to be displayed Manual ranging To select a range press the RANGE A or V key The instrument changes one range per keypress The selected range is displayed for one second If the instrument displays the OVERFLOW message on a particular range select a higher range until an on range reading is displayed Use the lowest range possible without causing an overflow to ensure best accuracy and resolution Note that the temperature and continuity functions have just one range Measurement Options 3 3 Autoranging To enable autoranging press the AUTO key The AUTO annunciator turns on when autoranging is selected While autoranging is selected the instrument automatically chooses the best range to measure the applied signal Autoranging should not be used when optimum speed is required Note that up ranging occurs at 120 of range while down ranging occurs at 10 of nominal range To cancel autoranging press AUTO or the RANGE A or key Pressing AUTO to cancel autoranging leaves the instrument on the present ra
30. of reading of range 23 C 5 C VOLTAGE CALIBRATION 3 Hz RANGE RESOLUTION CYCLE 10 Hz 100 0000 mV 0 1 pV 1 000000 V 1 0 pV 90 Days 0 35 0 03 10 00000 V 10 pV 100 0000 V 100 pV 1 Year 0 35 0 03 750 000 V 1mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT C 0 039 0 003 CURRENT CALIBRATION 3 Hz RANGE RESOLUTION CYCLE 10 Hz 1 000000 A 1 pA 90 Day 1 Year 0 30 0 04 3 00000 A9 10 uA 90 Day 1 Year 0 35 0 06 TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT c 0 035 0 006 HIGH CREST FACTOR ADDITIONAL ERROR of reading 7 Crest Factor 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 Additional Uncertainty 0 05 0 15 0 30 0 40 AC OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS 2 FUNCTION DIGITS RDGS s RATE BANDWIDTH ACV all ranges 643 0 5 0 4 SLOW 3 Hz 300 kHz and 6 3 1 4 1 5 MED 30 Hz 300 kHz ACI all ranges 644 4 0 4 3 MED 30 Hz 300 kHz 6 3 2 2 2 3 FAST 300 Hz 300 kHz 6 4 35 30 FAST 300 Hz 300 kHz AC SYSTEM SPEEDS 25 FUNCTION RANGE CHANGE 4 s AUTORANGETIME lt 3 s ASCII READINGS TO RS 232 19 2K BAUD 4 50 s MAX INTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 300 s MAX EXTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 300 s ADDITIONAL LOW FREQUENCY ERRORS of reading SLOW MED FAST 20Hz 30Hz 0 0 3 30Hz 50Hz 0 0 50 Hz 100 Hz 0 0 1 0 100 Hz 200 Hz 0 0 0 18 200 Hz 300 Hz 0 0 0 10 gt 300 Hz 0 0 0 10 Hz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 300 kHz 0 05 0 03 0 11 0 05 0 60 0 08 4 0 5 0 06 0 03 0 12 0 05 0 60 0 08 4 0 5 0 005 0 003 0 006 0 005 0 01 0 006 0 03 0 0
31. to assert REN Remote Enable the REN line would be set low true 2 Multiline commands General bus commands which are sent over the data lines with the ATN line true low 3 Common commands Commands that are common to all devices on the bus sent with ATN high false 4 SCPI commands Commands that are particular to each device on the bus sent with ATN false These bus commands and their general purpose are summarized in Table E 1 Table E 1 IEEE 488 bus command summary State of Command type Command ATN line Comments Uniline REN Remote Enable X Set up devices for remote operation EOI X Marks end of transmission IFC Interface Clear X Clears interface ATN Attention Low Defines data bus contents SRQ X Controlled by external device Multiline LLO Local Lockout Low Locks our local operation Universal DCL Device Clear Low Returns device to default conditions SPE Serial Enable Low Enables serial polling SPD Serial Poll Disable Low Disables serial polling Addressed SDC Selective Device Clear Low Returns unit to default conditions GTL Go To Local Low Returns device to local Unaddressed UNL Unlisten Low Removes all listeners from the bus UNT Untalk Low Removes any talkers from the bus Common High Programs IEEE 488 2 compatible instruments for common operations SCPI High Programs SCPI compatible instruments for particular operations IEEE 488 Bus O
32. 0 0 eeeeseeeeeeneeeceeaeeeeeeseseeeeaeenaeeaes 5 73 TRIGger commands 000 eee eeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeaeenseeees 5 74 SUNIT SUDSYStOM 2 iccscecsceeciescttvecedencadecesanceesdedsbeetactessesecendeanese 5 76 TEMPerature command 00 eeeeeeeseeseeseeeseeseseeeteenseeees 5 76 SVOLTage commands 0 0 ee eeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeees 5 77 Specifications Accuracy Calculations eeceesccescecesceseeeeeaeeeseeeeneeeseeeeaeeeeeeesaes A 8 Calculating DC characteristics accuracy sses A 8 Calculating AC characteristics aCCULAaCY eee eee trees A 8 Calculating dBm characteristics accuracy s es A 9 Calculating dB characteristics accuracy sses A 10 Additional derating factors eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees A 10 Optimizing measurement accuracy eeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees A 11 Optimizing measurement speed s ssssesessessseseessersssstssresssssee A 11 Status and Error Messages Example Programs Propratn CXamples seiss teisiriperenreosn sastra ra E A C 2 Changing function and range seesseseseeeeeeseeeresesrerrsreerrereens C 2 One shot triggering eee ee eeseeeeceeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaeeeaeeaeens C 4 Generating SRQ on buffer full ee eeeseeeeeeeeeee C 5 Storing readings in buffer 0 elec eseeeseeeeeeeteeeeaeeees C 6 Taking readings with the scanner card s C 8 Taking readings using the READ command C 12 Controlling the Model 2010 via the RS 232 COM2 port C 12 D Mode
33. 1 is 1m long the Model 7007 2 is 2m long Models 8501 1 and 8501 2 Trigger Link Cables Connect the Model 2010 to other instruments with Trigger Link connectors e g Model 7001 Switch System The Model 8501 1 is 1m long the Model 8501 2 is 2m long Model 8502 Trigger Link Adapter Lets you connect any of the six Trigger Link lines of the Model 2010 to instruments that use the standard BNC trigger connectors Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable Lets you connect Trigger Link lines one Voltmeter Complete and two External Trigger of the Model 2010 to instruments that use BNC trigger connectors The Model 8503 is 1m long 1 6 General Information Rack mount kits Model 4288 1 Single Fixed Rack Mount Kit Mounts a single Model 2010 in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 2 Side by Side Rack Mount Kit Mounts two instruments Models 182 428 486 487 2000 2001 2002 2010 6517 7001 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 3 Side by Side Rack Mount Kit Mounts a Model 2010 and a Model 199 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 4 Side by Side Rack Mount Kit Mounts a Model 2010 and a 5 25 inch instrument Models 195A 196 220 224 230 263 595 614 617 705 740 775 etc side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Carrying case Model 1050 Padded Carrying Case A carrying case for a Model 2010 Includes handles and shoulder strap 2 Basic Measurements 2 2 Basic Measu
34. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 IEEE 488 Interface Function Codes Behavior of 2010 when the address is set outside the range 0 30 Behavior of 2010 when valid address is entered Power On Setup Conditions Message Exchange Options Input buffer size Queries that return more than one response message unit Queries that generate a response when parsed Queries that generate a response when read Coupled commands Functional elements required for SCPI commands Buffer size limitations for block data Syntax restrictions Response syntax for every query command Device to device message transfer that does not follow rules of the standard Block data response size Common Commands implemented by 2010 Calibration query information Trigger macro for DDT Macro information Response to IDN identification Storage area for PUD and PUD Resource description for RDT and RDT Effects of RST RCL and SAV TST information Status register structure Sequential or overlapped commands Operation complete messages See Appendix E Cannot enter an invalid address Address changes and bus resets Determine by SYSTem POSetup Section 5 256 bytes None All queries Common Commands and SCPI None See Table F 2 Contained in SCPI command subsystems tables see Table 5 2 through Table 5 11 Block display messages 12 characters max See
35. 1A 1009 1V 1y R2 10V 10V 3A 3A 1kQ 10V 1V R3 100V 100V 3A 3A 10kQ 100V 10V R4 1000V 750V 3A 3A 100kQ 750V 100V R5 1000V 750V 3A 3A IMQ 750V 750V R6 1000V 750V 3A 3A 10MQ 750V R7 1000V 750V 3A 3A 10MQ 750V R8 100MQ Zero Rel ZO Zero disabled Zi Zero enabled Z2 Zero enabled using a zero value V 2 wire and 4 wire ohms Ohms range depends on firmware revision See Table D 2 Table D 1 cont Models 196 199 Commands Models 196 199 device dependent command summary D 3 Default conditions Data format SRQ V n nnnnnnE n LO GO Gl G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 MO M1 M2 M4 M8 M16 M32 Mode Command Description Filter PO Filter disabled P1 Moving filter count 10 P2 Repeat filter count 10 Rate SO 0 1 PLC integration S1 Line cycle integration 16 67ms 60Hz 20ms 50Hz S2 10 PLC 166 67ms integration 60Hz 200ms integration 50Hz Trigger mode TO Continuous on Talk T1 One shot on Talk T2 Continuous on GET T3 One shot on GET T4 Continuous on X T5 One shot on X T6 Continuous on External Trigger T7 One shot on External Trigger Reading mode BO Readings from A D converter Bl Individual readings from data store B2 All readings from data store buffer dump Data store size 10 Disable data store In Data store of n n 1 to 500 fill and stop Interval QO Default interval 175ms SELECT OFF Qn n interval in milliseconds 15ms to 999999ms Value V nn nnnnor Zero va
36. 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 IEEE754 single ritititit t ttttttt tttrtiy tttiiti precision data format O ee D D O D D DS DS D DS TS S OS D D DS O D O S S O D E A 32 data bits R a a cre eee eee 71 ttt I LOZI IEI tb O77 r e l Orr O s e f s sign bit 0 positive 1 negative e exponent bits 8 f fraction bits 23 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 The Header is only sent once for entire reading string DREal selects the binary IEEE754 double precision data format and is shown in Figure 5 3 normal byte order shown This format is similar to the single precision format except that it is 64 bits long Figure 5 3 Header Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 7 Byte 8 IEEE754 double r rtrrirrytrrrtrt ritttrrtryt trttit precision data format Se a a at LET 64 data bits JO TT oe ol bet web CEES eA 7i bt rtt 107th art re iO j7t ttt tb 10o 7t ttt 1 10 S a lt s e f Bytes 3 4 5 and 6 not shown s sign bit 0 positive 1 negative e exponent bits 11 f fraction bits 52 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 8 Byte 7 Byte 1 The Header is only sent once for entire reading string 5 30 SCPI Command Reference BORDer command BORDer lt name gt FORMat BORDer lt name gt Specify binary byte order Parameters lt name gt NORMal Normal byte order for binary formats SWAPped Reverse byte order for bi
37. 2010 Multimeter REN REMOTE 16 Goes into effect when next addressed to listen IFC ABORT Goes into talker and listener idle states LLO LOCAL LOCKOUT LOCAL key locked out GTL LOCAL 16 Cancel remote restore front panel operation for the 2010 LOCAL Cancel remote restore front panel operation for all devices DCL CLEAR Return all devices to known conditions SDC CLEAR 16 Returns Model 2010 to known conditions GET TRIGGER 16 Initiates a trigger SPE SPD SPOLL 16 Serial Polls the Model 2010 REN remote enable The remote enable command is sent to the Model 2010 by the controller to set up the instrument for remote operation Generally the instrument should be placed in the remote mode before you attempt to program it over the bus Simply setting REN true does not actually place the instrument in the remote state You must address the instrument to listen after setting REN true before it goes into remote Note that the instrument does not have to be in remote to be a talker Program fragment PRINT 1 remote 16 Place the Model 2010 in remote turn on REM annunciator Note that all front panel controls except for LOCAL and POWER are inoperative while the instrument is in remote You can restore normal front panel operation by pressing the LOCAL key IFC interface clear The IFC command is sent by the controller to place the Model 2010 Multimeter in the local talker listener idle states The unit responds to the IFC command by canceli
38. 25 5 35 5 52 5 5 1 1000 0000 V8 100 pV 10 MQ 1 17 6 31 6 41 6 55 6 5 1 Resistance 4 10 000000 Q 1 pQ 10 mA 15 9 40 9 60 9 100 10 8 6 100 00000 Q15 10 pQ 1 mA Isp 8 36 9 par 8 90 10 8 6 1 0000000 KQ 15 100 pQ 1 mA DFZ 33 2 50 2 80 2 8 1 10 000000 KQ 15 1 mQ 100 pA Br 2 Sap 2 50 2 80 2 8 1 100 00000 kQ 10 mQ 10 pA 15 4 40 4 70 4 120 4 8 1 1 0000000 MQ 8 100 mQ 10 pA 20 3 50 4 70 4 125 4 8 1 10 000000 MQ 1018 i 640 nA 10MQ 150 4 200 4 400 4 500 4 70 1 100 00000 MQ 1018 10 Q 640 nA 10MQ 800 4 1500 4 1500 4 1800 4 385 1 Dry Circuit 10 00000 Q 10 pQ l1 mA 20 mV 25 90 50 90 70 90 120 90 8 60 Resistance 5 100 0000 Q 100 yQ 100 pA 20 mV 25 90 50 90 70 90 120 90 8 60 Current 10 000000 mA 10 nA lt 0 15 V 60 30 300 80 500 80 740 80 50 5 100 00000 mA 100 nA lt 0 18 V 100 300 300 800 500 800 740 800 50 5 1 0000000 A 1 pA lt 0 35 V 200 30 500 80 800 80 1200 80 50 5 3 000000 A 10 pA lt 1 V 1000 15 1200 40 1200 40 1800 40 50 5 Continuity 2W 1kQ 100 mQ 1 mA 40 100 100 100 120 100 190 10 8 1 Diode Test 10 000000 V 1 pV lmA 20 6 30 7 40 7 55 7 8 1 4 400000 V 1 pV 100 pA 20 6 30 7 40 7 55 7 8 1 10 000000 V 1 pV 10 pA 20 6 30 7 40 7 aay 7 8 1 DCV DCV 100 mV Ratio accuracy accuracy of selected sense input range Ratio 6 to1000 V accuracy of selected input range DC OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS 2 DC NOISE PERFORMANCE FUNCTION DIGITS READINGS s PLCs RMS NOISE RMS N
39. 5 48 Basic Measurements 2 1 Buffer operations 3 16 Buffer statistics 3 17 Bus commands E 6 Bus description E 2 Bus lines E 4 Bus management lines E 4 Cables and adapters 1 5 Calculate subsystem 5 20 Calculating AC characteristics accuracy A 8 Calculating dB characteristics accuracy A 10 Calculating dBm characteristics accuracy A 9 Calculating DC characteristics accuracy A 8 Calibration 3 30 Carrying case 1 6 Case sensitivity 4 29 Changing function and range C 2 Command codes E 9 Command execution rules 4 32 Command path rules 4 32 Command words 4 27 Commands and command parameters 4 27 Common commands 4 34 E 9 Condition registers 4 17 Configuration 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 35 CONFigure Command 5 2 Connections 2 16 2 20 2 22 2 24 2 29 2 31 2 36 2 37 Control source and event detection 3 8 Controlling the Model 2010 via the RS 232 COM2 port C 12 Counters 3 10 3 24 Crest factor 2 17 Data lines E 4 dB calculation 2 35 dBm calculation 2 34 DC voltage DC current and resistance A 11 DCL device clear 4 13 Delay 3 9 Device actions 3 10 Digits 3 5 Display 2 16 DISPlay subsystem 5 26 Dry circuit testing 2 26 Enable registers 4 17 Enabling limits 3 19 Error and status messages 4 15 Error messages 4 7 Error queue 4 20 Event registers 4 17 Example Programs C 1 External scanning 3 28 External trigger 3 12 External triggering 3 11 External triggering example 3 12 External triggering wi
40. D 2 Models 196 199 Commands The Model 2010 can be configured to accept device dependent commands of the Keithley Models 196 199 The commands for controlling the Model 2010 with the 196 199 language are provided in Table D 1 Since the architecture of the Model 2010 differs from that of the 196 199 some commands are different or cannot be used Commands such as function offset compensated ohms AC current dB range analog and digital filter rate calibration factory defaults and self test do not map one for one Also note that the Model 2010 does not have the speed characteristics of the Models 196 199 Other commands of the Model 2010 have been added to the 196 199 command set such as frequency temperature and scanning Refer to the appropriate manual for further details CAUTION The 196 199 language is intended to be used only over the IEEE 488 bus Using front panel controls in conjunction with this language may cause erratic operation In this case results cannot be guaranteed Table D 1 Models 196 199 device dependent command summary Mode Command Description Execute X Execute other device dependent commands Function FO DC volts Fl AC volts F2 2 wire ohms F3 DC current F4 AC current F5 ACV dB F6 Not valid F7 2 wire offset compensation F8 Temperature F9 4 wire ohms F13 Frequency F14 4 wire offset compensation Range DCV ACV DCA ACA Ohms ACV dB Freq RO Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto R1 1V 1V100mA
41. Enable Register Questionable Event Enable Register Measurement Event Enable Register ESE 0 Clears the Standard Event Status Enable Register 4 18 Remote Operation Figure 4 6 Standard event status Figure 4 7 Operation event status ESR ae PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO y 5 i OR je D 1 To Event La A amp Summary Bit ESB of i 3 Status Byte A Register See Figure 4 10 ESE PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC ESE B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO PON Power On URQ User Request CME Command Error EXE Execution Error DDE Device Dependent Error QYE Query Error OPC Operation Complete amp Logical AND OR Logical OR Idle Trig Meas B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Ea A Idle Trig Meas B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO OR h le i To Operation Summary Bit OSB of Status EEN ae ee R i NN eel ee Byte Register Idle Trig Meas E Gee Figure 4 10 815 B11 610 9 68 6
42. F or K C y TEMPerature Query temperature units y VOLTage Path to configure voltage units V AC lt name gt Select ACV measurement units V DB or DBM V DB Path to set DB reference voltage REFerence lt n gt Specify reference in volts 1e 7 to 1000 1 REFerence Query DB reference DBM Path to set DBM reference impedance IMPedance lt n gt Specify reference impedance 1 to 9999 75 IMPedance Query DBM reference impedance AC Query ACV units DC lt name gt Select DCV measurement units V DB or DBM V DB Path to set DB reference voltage REFerence lt n gt Specify reference in volts 1e 7 to 1000 1 REFerence Query reference DBM Path to set DBM reference impedance IMPedance lt n gt Specify reference impedance 1 to 9999 75 IMPedance Query reference impedance DC Query DCV units Calculate subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to configure and control the Calculate subsystems and are summarized in Table 5 2 CALCulate 1 These commands are used to configure and control the MXB polynomial and percent math calculations Detailed information on math calculations is provided in Section 2 FORMat lt name gt CALCulate 1 FORMat lt name gt Parameters Query FORMat lt function gt NONE Specify CALC1 format No calculations Polynomial math calculation Percent math calculation Query programmed math format SCPI Command Reference 5 21
43. HI1 limit value HI1 1 000000 This value represents the absolute value of that function 2 Use the lt or keys to move to the number field Use the lt q gt A and W keys to enter the desired value Move the cursor to the rightmost position and use the A and V keys to move the decimal point 3 Press ENTER to view the present LO1 limit value LO1 1 000000 This value represents the absolute value of that function 4 Enter the desired value for this low limit 5 Press ENTER to view the present HI2 limits value HI2 2 000000 This value represents the absolute value of that function 6 Enter the desired value for this high limit 7 Press ENTER to view the present LO2 limit value LO2 2 000000 This value represents the absolute value of that function 8 Enter the desired value for the low limit Pressing ENTER returns to the normal display Measurement Options 3 19 Enabling limits Use the following procedure to turn on the limits operation 1 Press the SHIFT ON OFF keys to view the present beeper status BEEP NEVER 2 Use the A and W keys to change the beeper status NEVER OUTSIDE INSIDE Press ENTER when finished When the multimeter returns to the normal display the HI IN LO status is displayed along with the reading To disable limit testing press SHIFT ON OFF again An example of using limits to sort resistors is shown in Figure 3 11 Figure 3 11 bet ci LO IN HI Using li
44. INITiate CONTinuous ON e TRG When you send the OPC command the Model 2010 exits from OCIS and enters the Operation Complete Command Active State OCAS In OCAS the instrument continuously monitors the No Operation Pending flag After the last pending overlapped command is completed No Operation Pending flag set to true the Operation Complete OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register sets and the instrument goes back into OCIS Note that the instrument always goes into OCAS when OPC is executed If no pending command operations are present e g trigger model in idle state the Model 2010 immediately sets the OPC bit and returns to OCIS When used with the INITiate or INITiate CONTinuous ON command the OPC bit of the Standard Event Status Register will not set until the Model 2010 goes back into the idle state The initiate operations are not considered finished until the instrument goes into idle When used with the TRG command the OPC bit will not set until the operations associated with the TRG command and the initiate command are finished The TRG command is considered to be finished when the Device Action completes or when operation stops a control source to wait for an event see Trigger Model in this section To use the OPC exclusively with the TRG command first force the completion of the initiate command so that only the TRG command is pending Do this by sending the ABORt command to place the instrument i
45. If the total delay time per scan is greater than or equal to the timer setting the timer condition is already satisfied and is ignored Figure 3 15 Internal scanning example with timer and delay options SHIFT CONFIG TYPE INT MIN CHAN 1 MAX CHAN 10 OFF Note Factory setup on the Model 2010 is assumed O TIMER ON 00H 00M 05 000S Y RDG CNT 0010 y SCAN 10 channel closures 1 output trigger STEP 10 channel closures at 5 second intervals 10 output triggers RECALL 10 readings RDG CNT 0010 Yy DELAY MAN 00H 00M 05 000S y STEP 10 channel closures at 5 second intervals 10 output triggers SCAN 10 channel closures at 5 second intervals 1 output trigger RECALLL 10 readings Measurement Options 3 27 3 28 Measurement Options External scanning The example in Figure 3 16 shows the front panel operations to configure an external scan The trigger and signal connections were shown previously in Trigger operations Both instrument setups assume factory defaults Set the Model 2010 for the desired measurement function On the Model 7001 Switch System enter a scan list of channels 1 to 10 on card 1 Also on the Model 7001 configure the instrument for Trigger Link triggers and one scan of ten channels On the Model 2010 Multimeter configure an external
46. LL Low Limit BAV Buffer Available ROF Reading Overflow RAV Reading Available amp Logical AND OR Logical OR ayam Cal Temp Questionable B15 B14 B13 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Condition Register 0 y y y y Warn Cal Temp __ Questionable Event B15 B14 B13 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Register 0 1 6 OR ja A amp 0 To Questionable Warn Cal Temp Questionable Event Summary Bit QSB _ 15 B14 B13 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 Bo Enable Register of Status Byte Register See Figure 4 10 Warn Command Warning Cal Calibration Summary Temp Temperature Summary amp Logical AND OR Logical OR 4 20 Remote Operation Queues The Model 2010 uses two queues which are first in first out FIFO registers e Output Queue Used to hold reading and response messages Error Queue Used to hold error and status messages The Model 2010 Multimeter status model Figure 4 5 shows how the two queues are structured with the other registers Output queue The output queue holds data that pertains to the normal operation of the instrument For example when a query command is sent the response message is placed in the Output Queue When data is placed in the Output Queue the Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte Register sets A data message is cleared from the Output Queue when it is read The Output Queue is
47. Programming Syntax in Section 4 See Programming Syntax in Section 4 None See Display Subsystem in Section 5 See Common Commands in Section 4 Not applicable Not applicable See Common Commands in Section 4 Not applicable Not applicable See Common Commands in Section 4 See Common Commands in Section 4 See Status Structure in Section 4 All are sequential except INIT and INIT CONT ON which are overlapped OPC OPC and WAI see Common Commands in Section 4 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Table F 2 Coupled commands Command Also changes To TRAC POIN TRAC FEED CONT NEV TRAC CLE TRAC FEED CONT NEV Sense Subsystem Commands RANG UPP RANG AUTO OFF IREF ACQ REF presently displayed reading ROUT CLOS ROUT SCAN LSEL NONE ROUT OPEN ALL sROUT SCAN LSEL NONE sROUT SCAN INT sROUT SCAN LSEL INT Valid function command words i e WOLT DC VOLT AC etc F 3 F 4 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Index ABORt command 5 73 AVERage commands 5 47 AZERo commands 5 67 BEEPer command 5 64 BORDer command 5 30 CALCulate 5 20 CALCulate2 5 22 CALCulate3 5 24 CLEar command 5 67 5 71 CONDition command 5 60 CONTinuity command 5 54 DATA command 5 28 5 38 DATA command 5 72 DCIRcuit command 5 45 DIGits command 5 46 DIODe command 5 53 ELEMents command 5 31 ENABle command 5 58 ERRor command 5 66 EVEN
48. SENSe 1 FREQuency REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for FREQ SENSe 1 PERiod REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for PER SENSe 1 TEMPerature REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for TEMP SENSe 1 VOLT DC STERminals REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for sense terminals Parameters lt n gt 3 1 to3 1 Reference for ACI and DCI 757 5 to 757 5 Reference for ACV 1010 to 1010 Reference for DCV 10 1 to 10 1 Reference for DCV for sense terminals 0 to 120e6 Reference for Q2 and Q4 0 to 1 5e7 Reference for FREQ Oto 1 Reference for PER 200 to 1372 Reference for TEMP DEFault 0 all functions MINimum Minimum value for specified function MAXimum Maximum value for specified function Query REFerence Query programmed reference value REFerence DEFault Query RST default reference value Description REFerence MINimum Query lowest allowable reference value REFerence MAXimum Query largest allowable reference value These commands are used to establish a reference value for the specified function When Reference is enabled see REFerence STATe the result will be the algebraic difference between the input signal and the reference value Reading Input signal Reference From the front panel reference is called relative REL The REFerence lt n gt command is coupled to the ACQuire command The last command sent REFerence lt n gt or ACQuire establishes the reference When a reference is set using th
49. a dB reference level of 1 is 1V on all DCV measurement ranges DBM IMPedance lt n gt UNIT VOLTage DC DBM IMPedance lt n gt Specify dB reference Parameters lt n gt 1 to 9999 Specify reference impedance Query IMPedance Description This command is used to specify the dBm reference impedance level When dBm units is selected DCV dBm measurements are made using the specified dBm reference impedance The reference impedance is specified in ohms and is not range dependent For example a dBm reference level of 600 is 600 on all DCV measurement ranges A rational number is rounded to the nearest valid integer value Specifications A 2 Specifications Specifications The following pages contain the condensed specifications for the 2010 Every effort has been made to make these specifications complete by characterizing its performance under the variety of conditions often encountered in production engineering and research The 2010 provides transfer 24 hour 90 day 1 year and 2 year specifications with full specifications for the 90 day 1 year and 2 year intervals This allows the operator to utilize 90 day 1 year or 2 year recommended calibration intervals depending upon the level of accuracy desired As a general rule the 2010 s 2 year performance exceeds a 6 4 digit DMM s 90 day 180 day or 1 year specifications Absolute accuracy All DC specifications are given as relative accuracies To obtain absolut
50. addenda sosisini ia 1 3 Safety symbols and terms essesseseseesesersesrrsrrreserrersrsrrsesreerrsesees 1 3 Specifications ccssc sieediveteacedetects cue odds aiaa aaa 1 3 TiS PECULON eisai sicdivdtectsresteehatan butosssaddenensanslesaaeholedveasedsapeoneseasa dda 1 4 Options and accessories oo ee eseeceeseceeeeeececeteceeaesseeeaeeseeeaeeseees 1 4 SCANNER CANIS vias iesccssiesvaza cd aeasneasenshiusscdbes Waawedonsenyeseasadenacnenes 1 4 General purpose probes 200 0 eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeaeenees 1 4 Low thermal probes 0 0 ceeeseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeaeceeeeseeneeeaeeeaes 1 5 Cables and adapters uc 6 cc h secscsnsteseuecesceceeteostanvvesven cesses 1 5 Rack mount Kits 2 ccssciessesdaasevenssageies seer an 1 6 Carrying case pcrea KE Ai E E aa 1 6 2 Basic Measurements Introduction sssrini sssoseasedscseeenconescosteoadutevs ar aK raae 2 2 Front panel summary essssecssisisesescsrerssesesesossesreisesousrisssriseesssssss 2 3 Rear panel SUMMAry sssessessesesresesseetssesterrsrrstesrsresreresresrnresrrsreese 2 6 POWeET UD orenian a e a a aia 2 8 Line power connection sesseesssesseseesessesreresreresrerteresrrsrssese 2 8 Setting line voltage and replacing fuse 0 0 eee 2 9 Power up sequence 00 0 eeeeeeseeeteceseeeececeeeetaeeeaeestneeeaeeseas 2 10 High energy circuit safety precautions 0 eee eee 2 11 Power on defaults oo eee esseeeseeseeeseceeeeseesseeeseeeeseeeaes 2 12 GPIB primary address 200 eee ee eeees
51. card is being used as well as on the capabilities of the scanner card Refer to the documentation supplied with the scanner card for specific connection information Using an internal scanner card The optional Model 2000 SCAN scanner card lets you step through or scan up to ten two pole channels or five four pole channels The optional Model 2001 TCSCAN Thermocouple General Purpose Scanner Card lets you multiplex one of nine two pole or one of four four pole analog signals into the Model 2010 and or any combination of two or four pole analog signals Using external scanner cards When using external channels the switching mainframe controls the opening and closing of individual channels To synchronize Model 2010 measurements with external channel closures connect the Trigger Link lines of the multimeter and switching mainframe Refer to Trigger operations earlier in this section for details and an example on using external triggering Front panel scanner controls In addition to the trigger keys discussed previously front panel keys that affect scanner card operation include e lt q and gt Lets you manually step through consecutive internal card channels e OPEN and CLOSE Let you selectively open and close internal card channels SHIFT CONFIG Selects internal or external scanning scan list time between scans and reading count e STEP Starts a stepping operation of consecutive channels where output t
52. ccesceesceeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 5 10 STATus command summary cece seeeseeseeeseeseeeeeseeens 5 17 SYSTem command summary cee eeeeseeeeeseeseeeneeeeeees 5 18 TRACe command summary 0 ec ceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeees 5 18 Trigger command SUMMALY 1 0 eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeetens 5 19 UNIT command summary ccc ceeeeeesceeeseeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeneeeees 5 20 Status and Error Messages Status and error MESSAGES ceeeeeeeseeeecececeeseeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeees B 2 Models 196 199 Commands Models 196 199 device dependent command summaty D 2 Range selection for ohms function 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees D 6 E Table E 1 Table E 2 Table E 3 Table E 4 Table E 5 Table E 6 F Table F 1 Table F 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEE 488 bus command summary ceeseeeeeseeeeseeeteeeeees E 6 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes eeeeeeeeeeeee E 9 Typical addressed command sequence eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees E 11 Typical addressed command sequence seeeeeeeeeseeeees E 11 IEEE command groups escesccesscceseeeeneceseeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeees E 12 Model 2010 interface function codes cee eeeeesteeeteeeneeees E 13 TEEE 488 documentation requirements 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees F 2 Coupled commands 0 0 0 eceeeeseesceeseeseeeseeeeeeaeeneeeaeeeeeeaeenes F 3 General Information 1 2 General Information Introduction This section contains general info
53. channel in the scan list MINimum CHANnel by using the lt gt A and V keys and pressing ENTER Select the last channel in the scan list MAXimum CHANnel and press ENTER to confirm The next selection is for timed scans This is the Timer control source in the trigger model It sets a user specified interval for starting scans If you choose timed scans the Model 2010 prompts for a time interval 00H 00M 00 000S Use the lt d gt A and Y keys to select a time interval and press ENTER to confirm 3 24 Measurement Options 7 Next you are prompted for a reading count RDG CNT This can be less than equal to or greater than the scan list length up to 1024 It is the number of readings that will be stored in the buffer The effects of these choices are further described in the scanning examples 8 Press ENTER when finished to return to the normal display Note that scanned readings are always stored in the buffer up to the setting for RDG CNT Scanning examples The following examples demonstrate the use of reading count timed scans delay and external scanning Counters One of the configuration options for stepping and scanning is the reading count The example in Figure 3 14 shows how different settings of RDG CNT affect these operations Figure 3 14 SHIFT CONFIG Internal scanning TYPE INT example with reading MIN CHAN 1 Note Factory setup on the count option MAX CHAN 10 Model 2010 is assumed
54. characters that are enclosed in brackets are optional and need not be included in the program message Program messages A program message is made up of one or more command words sent by the computer to the instrument Each common command is simply a three letter acronym preceded by an asterisk SCPI commands are categorized in the STATus subsystem and are used to help explain how command words are structured to formulate program messages Command structure STATus Path Root OPERation Path ENABle lt NRf gt Command and parameter ENABle Query command PRESet Command Remote Operation 4 31 Single command messages The above command structure has three levels The first level is made up of the root command STATus and serves as a path The second level is made up of another path 0PERation and a command PRESet The third path is made up of one command for the OPERation path The three commands in this structure can be executed by sending three separate program messages as follows stat oper enab lt NRf gt stat oper enab stat pres In each of the above program messages the path pointer starts at the root command stat and moves down the command levels until the command is executed Multiple command messages You can send multiple command messages in the same program message as long as they are separated by semicolons The following is an example showing two commands in one program message
55. command GET Group Execute Trigger The GET command is used to trigger devices to perform a specific action that depends on device configuration for example take a reading Although GET is an addressed command many devices respond to GET without addressing Address commands Addressed commands include two primary command groups and a secondary address group ATN is true when these commands are asserted The commands include LAG Listen Address Group These listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address and are used to address devices to listen The actual command byte is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 TAG Talk Address Group The talk commands are derived from the primary address by ORing the address with 40 Talk commands are used to address devices to talk SCG Secondary Command Group Commands in this group provide additional addressing capabilities Many devices including the Model 2010 do not use these commands Unaddress commands The two unaddress commands are used by the controller to remove any talkers or listeners from the bus ATN is true when these commands are asserted UNL Unlisten Listeners are placed in the listener idle state by the UNL command UNT Untalk Any previously commanded talkers will be placed in the talker idle state by the UNT command IEEE 488 Bus Overview E 9 Common commands Common commands are commands that are common to
56. considered cleared when it is empty An empty Output Queue clears the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register Read a message from the Output Queue by addressing the Model 2010 Multimeter to talk after the appropriate query is sent Error queue The Error Queue holds error and status messages When an error or status event occurs a message that defines the error status is placed in the Error Queue This queue will hold up to 10 messages When a message is placed in the Error Queue the Error Available EAV bit in the Status Byte Register is set An error message is cleared from the Error Status Queue when it is read The Error Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Error Queue clears the EAV bit in the Status Byte Register Read an error message from the Error Queue by sending either of the following SCPI query commands and then addressing the Model 2010 to talk e SYSTem ERRor e STATus QUEue See Section 5 for more information about reading error messages Remote Operation 4 21 Status Byte and Service Request SRQ Service request is controlled by two 8 bit registers the Status Byte Register and the Service Request Enable Register Figure 4 10 shows the structure of these registers Figure 4 10 Status Summary Messages Status byte and service request SRQ lt Read by Serial Poll Service RQS Request STB B6 ESB MAV QSB EAV MsB Status Byte Generation Serial Poll MSS B5 B4
57. empty When the Error Queue is empty the 0 No error message is placed in the Error Queue The messages in the queue are preceded by a number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages The messages are listed in Appendix B After this command is sent and the Model 2010 is addressed to talk the oldest message in the queue is sent to the computer NOTE The STATus QUEue NEXT query command performs the same function as the SYSTem ERRor query command see System subsystem CLEar STATus QUEue CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This action command is used to clear the Error Queue of messages 5 62 SCPI Command Reference ENABle lt list gt STATus QUEue ENABle lt list gt Enable messages for Error Queue Parameter lt list gt numlist Query Description where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to enable for the Error Queue ENABle Query list of enabled messages On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want enabled Messages not specified will be disabled and prevented from entering the queue When this command is sent all messages will first be disabled then the messages specified in the list will be enabled Thus the returned li
58. enable register and applied to an OR gate The output of the OR gate is applied to the Status Byte Register Use the ESR Common Command to read the Standard Event Register All other event registers are read using the EVENt query commands in the STATus Subsystem See Section 5 for more information An event register is cleared when it is read The following operations clear all event registers e Cycling power Sending CLS Enable registers As Figure 4 5 shows each status register set has an enable register An enable register is programmed by you and serves as a mask for the corresponding event register An event bit is masked when the corresponding bit in the enable register is cleared 0 When masked a set bit in an event register cannot set a bit in the Status Byte Register 1 AND 0 0 To use the Status Byte Register to detect events i e serial poll you must unmask the events by setting 1 the appropriate bits of the enable registers To program and query the Standard Event Status Register use the ESE and ESE Common Commands respectively All other enable registers are programmed and queried using the ENABle and ENABle commands in the STATus Subsystem See Section 5 for more information An enable register is not cleared when it is read The following operations affect the enable registers e Cycling power Clears all enable registers e STATus PRESet clears the following enable registers Operation Event
59. front panel control Sets user delay between trigger and measurement Holds reading when the selected number of samples is within the selected tolerance Sets upper and lower limit values for readings Enables disables limits selects beeper operation for limit testing Selects the number of readings to be taken and the filter type moving average or repeating Performs ratio function between sense inputs denominator and measure inputs numerator for DC volts only Enables disables dry circuit testing Enables disables offset compensation Saves present configuration for power on user default Restores factory or user default configuration Selects minimum maximum channels timer and reading count for step scan Turns off step scan Enables disables GPIB interface selects address and language Enables disables RS 232 interface selects baud rate flow control terminator Selects display or key test Accesses calibration Moves to higher range increments digit and moves to next selection Moves to lower range decrements digit and moves to previous selection Enables disables autorange 5 Annunciators asterisk diode speaker a more 4W AUTO BUFFER CH 1 10 ERR FAST FILT Reading being stored Instrument is in diode testing function Beeper on for continuity or limits testing Indicates additional selections are available Four wire resistance reading displayed Autoranging enabled Recall
60. in the queue are preceded by a number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages Appendix B lists the messages NOTE The SYSTem ERRor query command performs the same function as the STATus QUEue query command see STATus subsystem SCPI Command Reference 5 67 AZERo commands STATe lt b gt SYSTem AZERo STATe lt b gt Control autozero Parameters lt b gt lorON Enable autozero 0 or OFF Disable autozero Query STATe Query state of autozero Description This command is used to disable or enable autozero When enabled accuracy is optimized When disabled speed is increased at the expense of accuracy NOTE Before you can enable or disable autozero the Model 2010 must first be in the idle state The Model 2010 can be placed in the idle state by first disabling continuous initiation INITiate CONTinuous OFF and then sending the ABORt command After sending the STATe command readings can be re started by sending INITiate CONTinuous ON or INITiate Program PRINT 1 output 16 init cont off abor Place 2010 in idle PRINT 1 output 16 syst azer stat off stat Disable autozero PRINT 1 enter 16 Get response from 2010 LINE INPUT 2 a Read response PRINT a Display response PRINT 1 output 16 init cont on Take 2010 out of idle NOTE When finished be sure to re enable autozero CLEar command C
61. interface and language is covered in Section 4 Self test The TEST selections are used as diagnostic tools to isolate problems within the Model 2010 Information on using these test procedures is included in the Model 2010 Service Manual Calibration The CAL selections are used to view the calibration date and next due date to perform calibration and to view the number of times calibration has been performed Some of the items are password protected to prevent unintended changing of calibration constants To view the calibration dates press SHIFT CAL Press ENTER at the DATES prompt The first date is the last time calibration was performed The NDUE date is the calibration due date Running calibration is password protected Refer to the Model 2010 Service Manual for details To view the calibration count press ENTER at the COUNT prompt Remote Operation 4 2 Remote Operation Introduction This section includes the following information e Selecting an interface e Selecting a language e RS 232 operation GPIB bus operation and reference e Status structure Trigger model GPIB operation e Programming syntax e Common commands Selecting an interface The Model 2010 multimeter supports two built in remote interfaces e GPIB bus e RS 232 interface You can use only one interface at a time The factory interface selection is the GPIB bus You can select the interface only from the front panel The interf
62. is executed its operations will then be performed In general another ABORt is performed then an INITiate and finally a FETCh to acquire the reading See READ for more details 5 6 SCPI Command Reference SCPI command subsystems reference tables Table 5 2 through Table 5 11 summarize the commands for each SCPI sub system The following list includes the SCPI subsystem commands and the table number where each command is summarized CALCulate command summary Table 5 2 DISPlay command summary Table 5 3 FORMat command summary Table 5 4 ROUTe command summary Table 5 5 SENSe command summary Table 5 6 STATus command summary Table 5 7 SYSTem command summary Table 5 8 TRACe command summary Table 5 9 TRIGger command summary Table 5 10 UNIT command summary Table 5 11 Notes e Brackets are used to denote optional character sets These optional characters do not have to be included in the program message Do not use brackets in the program message e Angle brackets lt gt are used to indicate parameter type Do not use angle brackets in the program message e The Boolean parameter lt b gt is used to enable or disable an instrument operation 1 or ON enables the operation and 0 or OFF disables the operation e Upper case characters indicate the short form version for each command word e Default Parameter Listed parameters are both the RST and SYSTem PRESet defaults unless noted otherwise
63. jack with your thumb and rotate the fuse carrier one quarter turn counter clockwise Release pressure on the jack and its internal spring will push the jack out of the socket 3 Remove the fuse and replace it with the same type 3A 250V fast blow 5 x 20mm The Keithley part number is FU 99 1 CAUTION Do not use a fuse with a higher current rating than specified or instrument damage may occur If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse See the Model 2010 Service Manual for troubleshooting information 4 Install the new fuse by reversing the procedure above See Section 3 for information on the configuration options for DC and AC current measurements 2 24 Basic Measurements Measuring resistance The Model 2010 can make two wire and four wire resistance measurements from 1uQ to 120MQ Connections Assuming factory default conditions the basic procedure is 1 Connect test leads to the Model 2010 as follows A For Q2 wire connect the test leads to INPUT HI and LO B For Q4 wire connect the test leads to INPUT HI and LO and SENSE 24 WIRE HI and LO Recommended Kelvin test probes include the Keithley Models 5805 and 5806 Either the front or rear inputs can be used place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position 2 Select the measurement function by pressing Q2 or Q4 3 Pressing AUTO toggles autoranging Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed w
64. of readings The number of readings is specified by the SAMPle COUNt command When READ is asserted the specified number of readings is taken After all the readings are taken they are sent to the computer Note that these readings are also stored in the buffer The following program takes 10 readings on the DCV function and displays them on the computer CRT For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls clear buffer and place 2010 in idle CALL SEND 16 rst status CALL SEND 16 trac cle status CALL SEND 16 sample coun 10 status CALL SEND 16 form elem read unit status CALL SEND 16 read status reading SPACES 300 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading Controlling the Model 2010 via the RS 232 COM2 port This example program illustrates the use of the Keithley Model 2010 interfaced to the RS 232 COM2 port The Model 2010 is set up to take 100 readings at the fastest possible rate 2000 per second The readings are taken sent across the serial port and displayed on the screen Example program controlling the Model 2000 vil the RS 232 COM2 port For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card RDS SPACES 1500 Set string space CLS Clear scre
65. of the other bits in the Status Byte Register see Common commands The IEEE 488 2 standard uses the STB common query command to read the Status Byte Register When reading the Status Byte Register using the STB command bit B6 is called the MSS bit None of the bits in the Status Byte Register are cleared when using the STB command to read it The IEEE 488 1 standard has a serial poll sequence that also reads the Status Byte Register and is better suited to detect a service request SRQ When using the serial poll bit B6 is called the RQS bit Serial polling causes bit B6 RQS to reset Serial polling is discussed in more detail later in this section Any of the following operations clear all bits of the Status Byte Register e Cycling power Sending the CLS common command NOTE The MAV bit may or may not be cleared Service request enable register This register is programmed by you and serves as a mask for the Status Summary Message bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register When masked a set summary bit in the Status Byte Register cannot set bit B6 MSS RQS of the Status Byte Register Conversely when unmasked a set summary bit in the Status Byte Register sets bit B6 A Status Summary Message bit in the Status Byte Register is masked when the corresponding bit in the Service Request Enable Register is cleared 0 When the masked summary bit in the Status Byte Register sets it is ANDed with
66. panel power switch to the on 1 position Figure 2 3 Model 2010 Power module DANN pemen se Window Fuse Holder Assembly Basic Measurements 2 9 Setting line voltage and replacing fuse A rear panel fuse located next to the AC receptacle protects the power line input of the instrument If the line voltage setting needs to be changed or the line fuse needs to be replaced perform the following steps WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the AC line and other equipment before changing the line voltage setting or replacing the line fuse 1 Place the tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the power module by the fuse holder assembly see Figure 2 3 Gently push in and move to the left Release pressure on the assembly and its internal spring will push it out of the power module 2 Remove the fuse and replace it with the type listed in Table 2 1 CAUTION For continued protection against fire or instrument damage only replace fuse with the type and rating listed If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse See the Model 2010 Service Manual for troubleshooting information 3 Ifconfiguring the instrument for a different line voltage remove the line voltage selector from the assembly and rotate it to the proper position When the selector is installed into the fuse holder assembly the correct line voltage appears inverted in the window 4
67. scan of the first ten channels Set the Model 2010 for external triggers by pressing EXT TRIG The display will be dashes Press STEP or SCAN on the Model 2010 The asterisk and STEP or SCAN annunciator will light Press STEP on the Model 7001 to start channel closures After the scan you can recall ten readings from the Model 2010 buffer VO O Oo OC NOTE When using an external thermocouple scanner card and channel 1 as a reference the Model 2010 only recognizes channel I when a step or scan is performed If using a Model 7001 or 7002 to close channel I manually the Model 2010 will not interpret that channel as the reference junction without a step or scan operation Measurement Options 3 29 Figure 3 16 Model 7001 Model 2010 External scanning example from reset setup from factory setup with Model 7001 Q SCAN CHANNELS 111 1110 CONFIGURE SCAN CHAN CONTROL CHANNEL SPACING TRIGLINK ASYNCHRONOUS CHAN COUNT 10 SCAN CONTROL SCAN COUNT 1 Y SHIFT CONFIG TYPE EXT MIN CHAN 001 MAX CHAN 010 TIMER OFF RDG CNT 0010 ENTER Y 4 EX TRIG Y STEP or SCAN Y RECALL 10 readings dd ary EXIT 3 30 Measurement Options System operations The Model 2010 has other front panel operations Saving and restoring setup information is described in Section 2 Selecting the remote
68. still in progress Use the WAI command to suspend the execution of subsequent commands until the device operations of all previous Overlapped commands are finished The WAI command is not needed for Sequential commands The Model 2010 has three overlapped commands e INITiate e INITiate CONTinuous ON e TRG NOTE See OPC OPC and TRG for more information The INITiate commands remove the Model 2010 from the idle state The device operations of INITiate are not considered complete until the Model 2010 returns to idle By sending the WAI command after the INITiate command all subsequent commands will not execute until the Model 2010 goes back into idle The TRG command issues a bus trigger that could be used to provide the arm scan and measure events for the Trigger Model By sending the WAI command after the TRG command subsequent commands will not be executed until the pointer for the Trigger Model has finished moving in response to TRG and has settled at its next state Program Fragment PRINT 1 output 02 syst pres Select defaults PRINT 1 output 02 init cont off abort Place 2010 in idle PRINT 1 output 02 trig coun 1 sour tim Program for 30 measurements and then stop idle PRINT 1 output 02 samp coun 30 PRINT 1 output 02 init wai Start measurements and send wait PRINT 1 output 02 data Query a reading PRINT 1 enter 02 Get reading after 2010 goes into
69. symbol on the instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on the instrument shows that high voltage may be present on the terminal s Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The WARNING heading used in this manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading used in this manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Specifications Full Model 2010 specifications are included in Appendix A 1 4 General Information Inspection The Model 2010 was carefully inspected electrically and mechanically before shipment After unpacking all items from the shipping carton check for any obvious signs of physical damage that may have occurred during transit Note There may be a protective film over the display lens which can be removed Report any damage to the shipping agent immediately Save the original packing carton for possible future shipment The following items are included with every Model 2010 order e Model 2010 Multimeter with line cord Safety test leads Model 1751 e Accessories as ordered e Certificate of calibration e Model 2010 User s Manual P N 2010 900 00 e Model 2010 Service Manual P N 2010 902 00 e Model 201
70. the program message For example SINITiate IMMediate These brackets indicate that MMediate is implied optional and does not have to used Thus the above command can be sent in one of two ways INITiate or INITiate MMediate Notice that the optional command is used without the brackets When using optional command words in your program do not include the brackets 4 28 Remote Operation Parameter types The following are some of the common parameter types lt b gt Boolean Used to enable or disable an instrument operation 0 or OFF disables the operation and 1 or ON enables the operation CURRent AC RANGe AUTO ON Enable autoranging lt name gt Name parameter Select a parameter name from a listed group lt name gt NEVer NEXT TRACe FEED CONTrol NEXT lt NRf gt Numeric representation format A number that can be expressed as an integer e g 8 a real number e g 23 6 or an exponent 2 3E6 SYSTem KEY 16 Press TEMP key from over the bus lt n gt Numeric value Can consist of an NRf number or one of the following name parameters DEFault MINimum or MAXimum When the DEFault parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the RST default value When the MINimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the lowest allowable value When the MAXimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the largest allowable value TRIGger TIMer 0 1 Sets timer to 100
71. trigger other instruments At the factory line 1 is configured as VMC and line 2 as EXT TRIG Changing this configuration is described in the Model 2010 Service Manual A connector pinout is shown in Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 Rear Panel Pinout Pin Number Description Rear panel pinout 1 Voltmeter Complete Output 876 2 External Trigger Input 6 03 3 No Connection Oy 4 No Connection _ 5 No Connection 6 No Connection Pin 2 Pin 1 7 Signal Ground External Voltmeter Trigger Complete 8 Signal Ground Input Output Either pin 3 or 5 may be configured as an output instead of pin 1 Either pin 4 or 6 may be configured as an input instead of pin 2 See the Model 2010 Service Manual for details 3 12 Measurement Options External trigger The EXT TRIG input requires a falling edge TTL compatible pulse with the specifications shown in Figure 3 4 In general external triggers can be used to control measure operations For the Model 2010 to respond to external triggers the trigger model must be configured for it Figure 3 4 Triggers on Trigger link input Leading Edge pulse specifications EXT TRIG TIL High 2V 5V TTL Low lt 0 8V lt 2us Se al Minimum Voltmeter complete The VMC output provides a TTL compatible output pulse that can be used to trigger other instruments The specifications for this trigger pulse are shown in Figure 3 5 Typically you would want the Model 2010 to output a trigger af
72. 0 Query COUNt Query filter count COUNt DEFault Query the RST default filter count COUNt MINimum Query the lowest allowable filter count COUNt MAXimum Query the largest allowable filter count Description These commands are used to specify the filter count In general the filter count is the number of readings that are acquired and stored in the filter buffer for the averaging calculation The larger the filter count the more filtering performed Bandwidth command BANDwidth lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC DETector BANDwidth lt n gt Specify maximum bandwidth for ACI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC DETector BANDwidth lt n gt Specify maximum bandwidth for ACV Parameters Query Description lt n gt 3 to 300e3 Specify bandwidth in Hz BANDwidth Query selected bandwidth The Model 2010 uses three bandwidth settings for ACI and ACV measurements 3 3Hz 300kHz 30 30Hz 300kHz and 300 300Hz 300kHz To achieve the best accuracy you should use the bandwidth setting that best reflects the frequency of the input signal For example if the input signal is 40Hz then a bandwidth setting of 30 should be used These commands are used to select bandwidth for the ACI and ACV functions To set the bandwidth simply specify approximately the frequency of the input signal The Model 2010 will automatically select the optimum bandwidth setting NOTE For bandwidth setting of 3 and 30 the normal A D reading conversion method i
73. 0 Support Software Disk including TestPoint run time applications TestPoint instrument libraries for GPIB and RS 232 and QuickBASIC examples If an additional manual is required order the appropriate manual package The manual packages include a manual and any pertinent addenda Options and accessories The following options and accessories are available from Keithley for use with the Model 2010 Scanner cards Model 2000 SCAN A ten channel scanner card that installs in the option slot of the Model 2010 Channels can be configured for two pole or four pole operation Included are two pairs of leads for connection to Model 2010 rear panel inputs Keithley P N CA 109 Model 2001 TCSCAN A thermocouple scanner card that installs in the option slot of the Model 2010 The card has nine analog input channels that can be used for high accuracy high speed scanning A built in temperature reference allows multi channel cold junction compensated temperature measurements using thermocouples General purpose probes Model 1754 Universal Test Lead Kit Consists of one set of test leads 0 9m two spade lugs two banana plugs two hooks and two alligator clips Model 8605 High Performance Modular Test Leads Consists of two high voltage 1000V test probes and leads The test leads are terminated with a banana plug with a retractable sheath on each end General Information 1 5 Model 8606 High Performance Probe Tip Kit Co
74. 0 out of remote Description Normally the Model 2010 is in local during RS 232 communications In this state front panel keys are operational However the user may wish to lock out front keys during RS 232 communications see RWLock This action command is used to take the Model 2010 out of the remote state and enable the operation of front panel keys Note that this command can only be sent over the RS 232 interface REMote SYSTem REMote Place the Model 2010 in remote Description This action command is used to place the Model 2010 in the remote state In remote the front panel keys will be locked out if local lockout is asserted see RWLock Note that this command can only be sent over the RS 232 interface RWhLock SYSTem RWLock Disable front panel keys Description This action command is used to disable front panel controls local lockout during RS 232 operation Taking the instrument out of remote see LOCal restores front panel keys operation Note that this command can only be sent over the RS 232 interface Line frequency query LFRequency SYSTem LFRequency Query line frequency Description This query returns the frequency of the power line from which the unit is operating The power line frequency is automatically sensed upon power up SCPI Command Reference 5 71 TRACe subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to configure and control data storage into the buffer The commands are summarized in Ta
75. 00 SCAN a 10 channel general purpose card and the Model 2001 TCSCAN a 9 channel thermocouple card with a built in cold junction For external scanning the Model 2010 is compatible with Keithley s Model 7001 and 7002 switch matrices and cards Programming languages and remote interfaces The Model 2010 offers two programming language choices SCPI and Keithley Models 196 199 and two remote interface ports TEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232C Reading and setup storage Up to 1024 readings and two setups user and factory defaults can be stored and recalled Closed cover calibration The instrument can be calibrated either from the front panel or remote interface General Information 1 3 Warranty information Warranty information is located at the front of this instruction manual Should your Model 2010 require warranty service contact the Keithley representative or authorized repair facility in your area for further information When returning the instrument for repair be sure to fill out and include the service form at the back of this manual to provide the repair facility with the necessary information Manual addenda Any improvements or changes concerning the instrument or manual will be explained in an addendum included with the manual Be sure to note these changes and incorporate them into the manual Safety symbols and terms The following symbols and terms may be found on the instrument or used in this manual The A
76. 1 10 Hz 3 kHz 3 kHz 5 kHz 0 10 0 04 0 14 0 04 0 15 0 06 0 18 0 06 0 015 0 006 0 015 0 006 AC GENERAL INPUT IMPEDANCE 1MQ 2 paralleled by lt 100pE ACV INPUT PROTECTION 1000V MAXIMUM DCV 400V on any ACV range ACI INPUT PROTECTION 3A 250V fuse BURDEN VOLTAGE 1A Range lt 0 35V rms 3A Range lt 1V rms SHUNT RESISTOR 0 19 on all ACI ranges AC CMRR gt 70dB with 1kQ in LO lead MAXIMUM CREST FACTOR 5 at full scale VOLT HERTZ PRODUCT lt 8 x 107 V Hz OVERRANGE 120 of range except on 750V and 3A ranges AC NOTES Specifications are for SLOW rate and sinewave inputs gt 5 of range Speeds are for 60Hz 50Hz operation using factory default operating conditions RST Auto zero off Auto range off Display off includes measurement and binary data transfer out the GPIB 0 01 of step settling error Trigger delay 400ms Trigger delay 0 DETector BANDwidth 300 NPLC 0 01 Maximum useful limit with trigger delay 175ms Applies to non sine waves gt 5Hz and lt 500Hz Guaranteed by design for Crest Factors gt 4 3 Applies to 0 18 C and 28 50 C For signal levels gt 2 2A add additional 0 4 to of reading uncertainty Typical uncertainties Typical represents two sigma or 95 of manufac tured units measure lt 0 35 of reading and three sigma or 99 7 lt 1 06 of reading Ne PT ead Be 2 p 1 HW 9 5 03 Rev C 2010 Low Noise Multimeter FREQUEN
77. 2 FLOW menu When the input queue of the Model 2010 becomes more than 3 4 full the instrument issues an X_OFF command The control program should respond to this and stop sending characters until the Model 2010 issues the X_ON which it will do once its input buffer has dropped below half full The Model 2010 recognizes X_ON and X_OFF sent from the controller An X_OFF will cause the Model 2010 to stop outputting characters until it sees an X_ON Incoming commands are processed after the lt CR gt character is received from the controller If NONE is the selected flow control then there will be no signal handshaking between the controller and the Model 2010 Data will be lost if transmitted before the receiving device is ready Perform the following steps to set flow control 1 Access the RS 232 configuration by pressing SHIFT and then RS2372 You see RS 232 ON assuming you have already selected the RS 232 interface 2 Go to the flow control field by using the A or W key You see FLOW lt control gt 3 Access the flow control options by pressing the gt key You see the flow control selection blinking 4 Use the A or W key to display the desired flow control NONE or XonXoFF and press ENTER You will then be prompted to set the terminator Continue for information about the terminator You can return to the measurement mode by pressing EXIT Setting terminator The Model 2010 can be configured to terminate each program message th
78. 3 20 SCPI 4 4 SCPI Command Reference 5 1 SCPI command subsystems reference tables 5 6 SCPI commands E 9 SCPI signal oriented measurement commands 5 2 SDC selective device clear 4 14 Selecting a language 4 3 Selecting an interface 4 2 Selecting baud rate 4 5 Selecting signal handshaking flow control 4 6 Selecting the primary address 4 10 Self test 3 30 Self test 3 30 Sending and receiving data 4 5 Sending a response message 4 33 Sending and receiving data 4 5 SENSe 1 subsystem 5 37 Serial poll and SRQ 4 23 Service request enable register 4 22 Setting limit values 3 18 Setting line voltage and replacing fuse 2 9 Setting terminator 4 6 Shielding 2 18 2 25 Short form rules 4 30 Single channel or channel pair control 5 32 Single command messages 4 31 SPE SPD serial polling 4 14 Specifications 1 3 A 1 Speed Commands 5 40 Status and Error Messages B 1 Status and error messages 2 16 Status Byte and Service Request SRQ 4 21 Status Byte Register 4 21 Status structure 4 16 STATus subsystem 5 54 Stepping and scanning trigger model additions 3 22 Storing readings 3 16 Storing readings in buffer C 6 subsystem 5 37 System operations 3 30 Taking readings using the READ command C 12 Taking readings with the scanner card C 8 Temperature A 11 Testing diodes 2 37 Thermal EMFs 2 18 Thermocouple commands 5 50 Threshold resistance level 2 36 Timing 3 26 Trigger level 2 28 Trigg
79. 6 High Performance Probe Tip Kit HW 9 5 03 Rev C A 8 Specifications Accuracy calculations The information below discusses how to calculate accuracy for both DC and AC characteristics Calculating DC characteristics accuracy DC characteristics accuracy is calculated as follows Accuracy ppm of reading ppm of range ppm parts per million and 10ppm 0 001 As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits assume that you are measuring 5V on the 10V range You can compute the reading limit range from one year DCV accuracy specifications as follows Accuracy 30ppm of reading 5ppm of range 24ppm x 5V 4ppm x 10V 120nV 40nV 160pV Thus the actual reading range is 5V 160 V or from 4 99984V to 5 00016V DC current and resistance calculations are performed in exactly the same manner using the pertinent specifications ranges and input signal values Calculating AC characteristics accuracy AC characteristics accuracy is calculated similarly except that AC specifications are given as follows Accuracy of reading of range As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits assume that you are measuring 120V 60Hz on the 750V range You can compute the reading limit range from ACV one year accuracy specifications as follows Accuracy 0 06 of reading 0 03 of range 0 0006 x 120V 0 0003 x 750V 0 072V 0 225V 0 297V In this case the actual
80. 7 Bo 65 64 63 B2 B1 BO Idle Idle state of the 2010 Trig Triggering Meas Measuring amp Logical AND OR Logical OR Standard Event Status Register Standard Event Status Enable Register Operation Condition Register Operation Event Register Operation Event Enable Register Figure 4 8 Measurement event status Figure 4 9 Questionable event status Remote Operation 4 19 S BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 H LL1 ROF Measurement B15 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B B1 BO Condition Register Y Y Y Y Y BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 H LL1 ROF Measurement Event B15 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Register N k L ee BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF Measurement Event MSB ae eet B15 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Enable Register Byte Register See Figure 4 10 BFL Buffer Full HL High Limit BHF Buffer Half Full
81. 9 75 00 Fax 0118 929 75 19 1 5 Eagles Street e Langford Town Bangalore 560 025 080 212 80 27 Fax 080 212 80 05 Viale San Gimignano 38 20146 Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 30 22 74 New Pier Takeshiba North Tower 13F 11 1 Kaigan 1 chome Minato ku Tokyo 105 0022 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 2FL URI Building 2 14 Yangjae Dong Seocho Gu Seoul 137 888 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 Postbus 559 4200 AN Gorinchem 0183 63 53 33 Fax 0183 63 08 21 c o Regus Business Centre Frosundaviks All 15 4tr 16970 Solna 08 50 90 46 00 Fax 08 655 26 10 13F 3 NO 6 Lane 99 Pu Ding Road Hsinchu Taiwan ROC 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 Copyright 2003 Keithley Instruments Inc Printed in the U S A 5 03
82. ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC NPLCycles lt n gt Set NPLC for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles lt n gt Set NPLC for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance NPLCycles lt n gt Set NPLC for 94 SENSe 1 TEMPerature NPLCycles lt n gt Set NPLC for TEMP Parameters lt n gt 0 01 to 10 Power line cycles per integration DEFault 1 MINimum 0 01 MAXimum 10 Query NPLCycles Query programmed NPLC value NPLCycles DEFault Query RST default value NPLCycles MINimum Query minimum NPLC value NPLCycles MAXimum Query maximum NPLC value Description The integration period measurement speed for the basic measurement functions except Frequency and Period is set using the NPLCycle command NPLC Number of Power Line Cycles expresses the integration period by basing it on the power line frequency For example for a PLC of 1 the integration period in seconds would be 1 60 for 60Hz line power which is 16 67msec SCPI Command Reference 5 41 RANGe commands UPPer lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC RANGe UPPer lt n gt Set measurement range for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe UPPer lt n gt Set measurement range for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC RANGe UPPer lt n gt Set measurement range for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe UPPer lt n gt Set measurement range for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe UPPer lt n gt Set measurement range for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance RANGe UPPer lt n gt Set measurement range for 04 SENSe 1 VOL
83. C AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type for 24 SENSe 1 TEMPerature AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type for TEMP Parameters lt name gt REPeat Select repeating filter MOVing Select moving filter Query TCONtrol Query filter type Description These commands are used to select the type of averaging filter REPeat or MOVing for the specified function These filter types are explained in Section 3 The number of readings that are averaged by the filter is set with the AVERage COUNt command The AVERage STATe command is used to enable or disable the filter Changing the filter type disables auto filter 5 48 SCPI Command Reference COUNt lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count for Q4 SENSe 1 TEMPerature AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count for TEMP Parameters lt n gt 1 to 100 Specify filter count DEFault 10 MINimum 1 MAXimum 10
84. CALL initialize 21 0 Reset the SENSel subsystem settings along with the trigger model each READ will cause one trigger CALL SEND 16 rst status Set range for each function to measure CALL SEND 16 volt dc rang 1 status CALL SEND 16 volt ac rang 20 status CALL SEND 16 res rang 80 status Switch to DC volts and take reading CALL SEND 16 func volt dc read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading Switch to AC volts and take reading CALL SEND 16 func volt ac read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading Switch to 2 wire ohms and take reading CALL SEND 16 func res read status reading SPACES 80 CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT reading C A Example Programs One shot triggering Other DMMs generally have two types of triggering one shot and continuous In one shot each activation of the selected trigger source causes one reading In continuous the DMM is idle until the trigger source is activated at which time it begins taking readings at a specified rate Typical trigger sources are JEEE 488 talk JEEE 488 Group Execute Trigger GET e X command e External trigger rear panel BNC Arming the instrument to respond to triggers is implicit in the non SCPI DMMs Sending a command to a non SCPI DMM to change any of the trig
85. CONTrol NEXT start now stop when buffer is full The following example program sets up the Model 2010 to take 20 readings as fast as it can into the buffer and then reads the data back after the buffer has filled Example Programs Example program to demonstrate the reading buffer For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls and put trigger model in IDLE state CALL SEND 16 rst status Reset STATus subsystem not affected by RST CALL SEND 16 Stat pres cls status CALL SEND 16 Stat meas enab 512 status enable BFL CALL SEND 16 sre 1 status enable MSB CALL SEND 16 trig coun 20 status TRACe subsystem is not affected by RST CALL SEND 16 trac poin 20 status CALL SEND 16 trac feed sensl1 feed cont next status Start everything CALL SEND 16 init status Initialize reading while the 2010 is busy taking readings reading SPACES 4000 WaitSRQ IF NOT srq THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SPOLL 16 poll status IF poll AND 64 0 THEN GOTO WaitSRQ CALL SEND 16 Stat meas status CALL ENTER S lengths 16 status CALL SEND 16 form elem read unit status CALL SEND 16 trac data status CALL ENTER reading length 16 status PRINT r
86. CY AND PERIOD CHARACTERISTICS 2 RESOLUTION ACCURACY ACV FREQUENCY PERIOD GATE ppm of 90 Day 1 Year RANGE RANGE RANGE TIME reading of reading 100 mV 3 Hz 333 ms to to to ls 0 3 0 01 750V 500 kHz 2 us FREQUENCY NOTES 1 Specifications are for square wave inputs only Input signal must be gt 10 of ACV range If input is lt 20mV on the 100mV range then the frequency must be gt 10Hz 2 20 overrange on all ranges except 750V range TEMPERATURE CHARACTERISTICS THERMOCOUPLE 23 4 ACCURACY 90 DAY 1 YEAR 23 C 5 C RELATIVE TO SIMULATED USING TYPE RANGE RESOLUTION REFERENCEJUNCTION 2001 TCSCAN J 200 to 760 C 0 001 C 0 5 C 0 65 C K 200 to 1372 C 0 001 C 0 5 C 0 70 C N 200 to 1300 C 0 001 C 0 5 C 0 70 C T 200 to 400 C 0 001 C 0 5 C 0 68 C 4 WIRE RTD 237 8 90 DAY 1 YEAR 2YEAR 23 C 5 C 23 C 5 C RANGE RESOLUTION ACCURACY ACCURACY 100 to 100 C 0 001 C 0 08 C 0 12 C 200 to 630 C 0 001 C 0 14 C 0 18 C Temperature Notes 1 For temperatures lt 100 C add 0 1 C and gt 900 C add 0 3 C 2 Temperature can be displayed in C K or E 3 Accuracy based on ITS 90 4 Exclusive of thermocouple error 5 Specifications apply to channels 2 6 Add 0 06 C channel from channel 6 6 Excluding probe errors 7 100Q platinum D100 F100 PT385 PT 3916 or user type 8 Maximum lead resistance each lead to achieve rated accuracy is 5Q INTERNAL
87. D DEV Standard Deviation Value w Average Average Value Min At XX Minimum Value Max At XX Maximum Value Ga gt Buffer statistics The MAX AT and MIN AT values are the maximum and minimum values in the buffer The AVERAGE value is the mean of the buffered readings The equation used to calculate the mean is n X xi _ i l y n where Xj is a stored reading n is the number of stored readings The STD DEV value is the standard deviation of the buffered readings The equation used to calculate the standard deviation is 2 1 s 2 A A y fi l i l n 1 where Xj is a stored reading n is the number of stored readings NOTE The Model 2010 uses IEEE 754 floating point format for math calculations 3 18 Measurement Options Limit operations Limit operations set and control the values that determine the HI IN LO status of subsequent measurements Limits can be applied to all measurement functions except continuity The limit test is performed after mX b and percent math operations Unit prefixes are applied before the limit test for example e Low limit 1 0 High limit 1 0 A 150mV reading equals 0 15V IN e Low limit 1 0 High limit 1 0 A 0 6kQ reading equals 600Q HI You can configure the multimeter to beep when readings are inside or outside of the limit range Setting limit values Use the following steps to enter high and low limit values 1 Press the SHIFT LIMITS keys to view the present
88. E 451 1 vac dac error EE 452 10 vac dac error EE 453 100 vac dac error EE 454 100m vac zero error EE 455 100m vac full scale error EE 456 1 vac zero error EE 457 1 vac full scale error EE Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Status and Error Messages Number Description Event 458 1 vac noise error EE 459 10 vac zero error EE 460 10 vac full scale error EE 461 10 vac noise error EE 462 100 vac zero error EE 463 100 vac full scale error EE 464 750 vac zero error EE 465 750 vac full scale error EE 466 750 vac noise error EE 467 Post filter offset error EE 468 1 aac zero error EE 469 1 aac full scale error EE 470 3 aac zero error EE 471 3 aac full scale error EE 472 1V 10Hz amplitude error EE 473 Frequency gain error EE 474 10 vdc sense zero error EE 475 10 2 w zero error EE 476 10 4 w zero error EE 477 10 4 w full scale error EE 478 1 adc zero error EE 479 10 ohm DryCkt zero error EE 480 10 ohm DryCkt FS error EE 481 100 ohm DryCkt zero error EE 482 100 ohm DryCkt FS error EE 483 10 Ohm Ioff Ocomp FS error EE 484 10 Ohm 4 w Ioff Ocomp DryCkt FS error EE 485 1K Ohm Ioff Ocomp FS error EE 486 100 Ohm 4 w Ioff Ocomp DryCkt FS error EE 487 10K Ohm Ioff Ocomp FS error EE 490 Front rear switch incorrect EE 499 1V 10Hz frequency error EE 500 Calibration data invalid EE 510 Reading buffer data lost EE 511 GPIB address lost EE 512 Power on state lost EE 513 AC calibra
89. E Ea 3 13 Trigger link CONNECTIONS 20 eee cece eseeeeeeseeeeeereeeeeeneeeaeees 3 13 Operation model for triggering example 0 0 0 eee 3 14 DIN to BNC trigger cable oo cece eeseeseeseeereeeeeeeeeneees 3 15 Butler locators seiss aissi setri ais 3 17 Using limits test to sort 100Q 10 resistors 1 0 eee 3 19 Front panel triggering with stepping eee eeeeeeseeeeeee 3 22 Front panel triggering with scanning eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 3 23 Internal scanning example with reading count option 3 24 Internal scanning example with timer and delay options 3 27 External scanning example with Model 7001 ee 3 29 Remote Operation RS 232 interface connector eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeees 4 7 TREE 488 CONMOCUOR ainesse onesies eass 4 8 TEEE 488 connections ssssssssssessesesssrsrsesssesssessesessseenesesesenes 4 9 TEEE 488 connector location ssesseseseesesreresrererrrerrsrerreresee 4 9 Model 2010 status register structure esesseseseeseseeerrsrerreeee 4 16 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 5 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 E Figure E 1 Figure E 2 Figure E 3 Standard event status cccecececssssssssssssssscsceeceseececeeesceeeners 4 18 Operation event Status oe e cee eeseeseeeeeseees
90. E will change to USER DIODe command sRANGe UPPer lt NRf gt SENSe 1 DIODe CURRent RANGe UPPer lt NRf gt Select current range for diode test Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to le 3 Specify diode test current Query UPPer Query selected range Description There are three current ranges available for the diode test 10uA range 100A range and the 1mA range Range is selected by using this command to specify the expected current for the diode under test The instrument will then automatically select the appropriate range 5 54 SCPI Command Reference lt CONTinuity command THReshold lt n gt SENSe 1 CONTinuity THReshold lt NRf gt Specify threshold resistance Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 1000 Specify threshold in ohms Query THReshold Query threshold resistance This command is used to specify the threshold resistance for the continuity test Continuity occurs when the measurement is less than or equal to the specified threshold level STATus subsystem The STATus subsystem is used to control the status registers of the Model 2010 The commands in this subsystem are summarized in Table 5 7 LEVEN command EVENE STATus MEASurement EVENt Read Measurement Event Register STATus OPERation EVENt Read Operation Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read Questionable Event Register Description These query commands are used to read the event registers After sending one of these commands and addres
91. EAR Path to clear failed test y IMMediate Clear failed test indication y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear ON y AUTO Query auto clear y IMMediate Re perform limit tests y Note ON is the RST default parameter and OFF is the SYSTem PRESet default Table 5 3 DISPlay command summary nls Default Command Description parameter SCPI DISPlay WINDow 1 y TEXT Path to control user text messages Note 1 y DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message a up to 12 characters y DATA Query text message V STATe lt b gt Enable or disable message mode Note 2 y STATe Query text message state y ENABle lt b gt Enable or disable the front panel display Note 3 V ENABle Query state of the display V Notes 1 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on a user defined message Cycling power cancels all user defined messages 2 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on the state of the message mode Cycling power disables OFF the message mode 3 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on the display circuitry Cycling power enables ON the display circuitry SCPI Command Reference 5 9 Table 5 4 FORMat command summary Command Description oe SCPI parameter FORMat DATA lt type gt lt length gt Select data format ASCii SREal or DREal ASCii y DATA Query data format y ELEMents lt item list gt Specify data elements READing CHANnel and UNITs READing
92. FT then GPIB You see GPIB OFF 2 Move to the on off selection by pressing the key You see the OFF selection blinking 3 Turn on the GPIB interface by toggling the selection to ON using the V or A key and press ENTER Turning off the RS 232 interface automatically selects GPIB as the remote programming interface Selecting a language Choose one of the following languages to program the Model 2010 multimeter e SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands e Keithley Models 196 199 Digital Multimeter NOTE The 196 199 language is intended for use only over the IEEE 488 bus Using front panel controls with this language may cause erratic operation In this case results cannot be guaranteed The factory sets the language selection as SCPI You only can select a programming language from the front panel The language selection is stored in non volatile memory which means it does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Table 4 1 shows the languages supported by the two available interfaces Table 4 1 Language support Language GPIB RS 232 SCPI Yes Yes Keithley Models 196 199 Yes No The language you select determines the remote operations allowed 4 4 Remote Operation To select a programming language follow these steps 1 a SCPI Access the GPIB configuration options by pressing SHIFT then GPIB You see GPIB ON with GPIB blinking Select the language con
93. Fault 0 05463 MINimum 0 09999 MAXimum 0 09999 Query OFFSet Query voltage offset OFFSet DEFault Query RST default voltage offset OFFSet MINimum Query lowest allowable voltage offset OFFSet MAXimum Query largest allowable voltage offset Description This command is used to specify the offset voltage at 0 C for the specified reference junction 5 52 SCPI Command Reference FRTD commands TYPE lt name gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD TYPE lt name gt Parameters lt name gt PT100 D100 F100 PT3916 PT385 USER Query TYPE Specify FRTD parameters Selects default parameters for the PT100 standard ITS 90 Selects default parameters for the D100 standard ITS 90 Selects default parameters for the F100 standard ITS 90 Selects default parameters for the PT3916 standard IPTS 68 Selects default parameters for the PT385 standard IPTS 68 Selects user defined standards Query type of FRTD sensor Description This command is used to select the FRTD standard and other related factors When one of the parameters other than USER is selected the multimeter defaults to the following factors Type Alpha Beta Delta Q at 0 C PT100 0 003850 0 11100 1 50700 100Q D100 0 003920 0 10630 1 49710 100Q F100 0 003900 0 11000 1 49589 100Q PT385 0 003850 0 11100 1 50700 100Q PT3916 0 003916 0 11600 1 50594 100Q Changing alpha see ALPHa beta see BETA delta see DELTa or Q at 0 C see RZERo automat
94. I Command Reference DIGits command DIGits lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for Q94 SENSe 1 PERiod DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for PER SENSe 1 FREQuency DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for FREQ SENSe 1 TEMPerature DIGits lt n gt Specify resolution for TEMP Parameters lt n gt 4 3 digits 5 442 digits 6 5 digits 7 6 2 digits 8 T 2 digits DEFault 5 digits for ACI and ACV 6 digits for TEMP FREQ PER 72 digits for DCI DCV Q2 Q4 MINimum 3 digits for ACI ACV DCI DCV Q2 Q4 TEMP FREQ PER MAXIMUM 6 digits for ACI ACV TEMP FREQ PER 4 if dryckt is on 72 digits for DCI DCV Q2 Q4 Query DIGits Query selected resolution DIGits DEFault Query RST default resolution DIGits MINimum Query minimum allowable resolution DIGits MAXimum Query maximum allowable resolution Description These commands are used to select display resolution for the specified measurement function Even though the parameters for this command are expressed as integers 4 to 7 you can specify resolution using real numbers For example to select 3 di
95. I commands are included in the trigger model Figure 4 11 ABOrt rigger r RCL T 188el model remote O sk Peranon SYST PRES Language Change INIT IMM Idle or and INIT CONT ON No Initiate 2 Yes Trigger Signal Another Trigger 2 lt Trigger Count lt n gt Infinite Control Event Source Detection Output Trigger Source Immediate lt Trigger Trigger Source External Trigger Source Timer Trigger Source Manua Trigger Source BUS lt Yes Another Sample y Sample Count lt n gt Trigger Delay lt n gt Trigger Delay AUTO lt b gt Delay Device Action see Figure 4 12 Remote Operation 4 25 Idle and initiate The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not operating While in the idle state the instrument cannot perform any measure or scan functions You can send two commands over the bus to remove the instrument from the idle state e INITiate e INITiate CONTinuous ON With continuous initiation enabled INITiate CONTinuous ON the instrument will not remain in the idle state after all programmed operations are completed However you can return the instrument to the idle state at any time by sending any of these commands e RST ABORt e RCL e SYST PRES Trigger model operation Once the instrument is taken out of idle operation procee
96. LEar SYSTem CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This action command is used to clear the Error Queue of messages 5 68 SCPI Command Reference KEY lt NRf gt command SYSTem KEY lt NRf gt Simulate key press Parameters lt NRf gt 1 SHIFT key lt NRf gt 17 LOCAL key 2 DCV key 18 EX TRIG key 3 ACV key 19 TRIG key 4 DCtIkey 20 STORE key 5 ACI 21 RECALL key 6 Q2 key 22 FILTER key T7 Q4 key 23 REL key 8 FREQ key 24 left arrow key 9o 2 10 26 OPEN key 11 up arrow key 27 CLOSE key 12 AUTO key 28 STEP key 13 down arrow key 29 SCAN key 14 ENTER key 30 DIGITS key 15 rightarrow key 31 RATE key 16 TEMP key 32 EXIT key Query KEY Query last pressed key Description This command is used to simulate front panel key presses For example to select DCV you can send the following command to simulate pressing the DCV key isyst key 2 The parameter listing provides the key press code in numeric order Figure 5 10 also illustrates the key press codes The queue for the KEY query command can only hold one key press When KEY is sent over the bus and the Model 2010 is addressed to talk the key press code number for the last key pressed either physically or with KEY is sent to the computer SCPI Command Reference 5 69 Figure 5 10 Key press codes KEITHILEY 18 27 20 29 22 31 24 14 12 5 70 SCPI Command Reference RS 232 interface commands LOCal SYSTem LOCal Take 201
97. LOSe lt chan num gt ROUTe CLOSe lt chan num gt Close specified channel or channel pair Parameter Description lt chan num gt X Specify channel X where X is a single channel 1 through 10 or a channel pair 1 through 5 to be closed This command lets you close a single channel or channel pair on the internal scanner card Only one channel or channel pair can be closed at a time When this command is sent any closed channels are first opened Then the specified channel or channel pair closes When using this command pole mode 2 pole or 4 pole is determined by the present measurement function With a 2 wire function selected i e DCV 2 pole switching will be performed at the scanner card The specified channel 1 through 10 will close With a 4 wire function selected i e W4 4 pole switching will be per formed at the scanner card The specified channel pair 1 through 5 will close In the 4 pole mode channels are paired as follows e Channel 1 is paired to Channel 6 e Channel 2 is paired to Channel 7 e Channel 3 is paired to Channel 8 e Channel 4 is paired to Channel 9 e Channel 5 is paired to Channel 10 Examples 2 pole mode 4 pole mode rout clos 2 Close channel 2 Close channels 2 and 7 rout clos 4 Close channel 4 Close channels 5 and 9 rout clos 7 Close channel 7 Not valid When a channel or channel pair is closed using this command the channel annunciator that corresponds t
98. Measuring continuity 2 36 Measuring current 2 22 Measuring frequency and period 2 28 Measuring resistance 2 24 Measuring temperature 2 30 Measuring voltage 2 16 Measuring voltage with the SENSE terminals 2 21 Message exchange protocol 4 33 Models 196 199 Commands D 1 Models 196 199 device dependent command summary D 2 Multiple channel control 5 34 Multiple command messages 4 31 Multiple response messages 4 33 mX b 2 33 Offset compensation 2 26 One shot triggering C 4 Optimizing measurement accuracy A 11 Optimizing measurement speed A 11 Options and accessories 1 4 Output queue 4 20 Output trigger 3 10 Percent 2 34 Power on defaults 2 12 Power up 2 8 Power up sequence 2 10 Program examples C 2 Program message terminator PMT 4 32 Program messages 4 30 Programming syntax 4 27 Query commands 4 29 Queues 4 20 QuickBASIC 4 5 programming 4 10 Rack mount kits 1 6 Range 2 37 3 2 Range selection for ohms function D 6 Rate 3 6 Ratio 2 20 READ command 5 4 Reading hold autosettle 3 10 Rear panel summary 2 6 Recalling readings 3 16 Relative 3 5 Remote Operation 4 1 REN remote enable 4 12 Response message terminator RMT 4 33 Response messages 4 33 Response time 3 4 ROUTe subsystem 5 32 RS 232 4 2 RS 232 connections 4 7 RS 232 interface commands 5 70 RS 232 operation 4 5 Safety symbols and terms 1 3 Scan operations 3 20 Scanner cards 1 4 Scanning examples 3 24 Scanning overview
99. Model 2010 Multimeter User s Manual A GREMMBBR MEASURE CONFIDENCE WARRANTY Keithley Instruments Inc warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 3 years from date of shipment Keithley Instruments Inc warrants the following items for 90 days from the date of shipment probes cables rechargeable batteries diskettes and documentation During the warranty period we will at our option either repair or replace any product that proves to be defective To exercise this warranty write or call your local Keithley representative or contact Keithley headquarters in Cleveland Ohio You will be given prompt assistance and return instructions Send the product transportation prepaid to the indicated service facility Repairs will be made and the product returned transportation prepaid Repaired or replaced products are warranted for the balance of the original warranty period or at least 90 days LIMITATION OF WARRANTY This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from product modification without Keithley s express written consent or misuse of any product or part This warranty also does not apply to fuses software non rechargeable batteries damage from battery leakage or problems arising from normal wear or failure to follow instructions THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FO
100. NVIRONMENT Specified for 0 C to 50 C Specified to 80 R H at 35 C Altitude up to 2000 meters STORAGE ENVIRONMENT 40 C to 70 C WARRANTY 3 years SAFETY Conforms to European Union Directive 73 23 EEC EN61010 1 CAT II EMC Complies with European Union Directive 89 336 EEC EN61326 1 VIBRATION MIL PRF 28800F Class 3 Random WARMUP 2 hours to rated accuracy DIMENSIONS Rack Mounting 89mm high x 213mm wide x 370mm deep 3 in x 8 in x 14 e6in Bench Configuration with handle and feet 104mm high x 238mm wide x 370mm deep 4 in x 9 in x 14 6 in SHIPPING WEIGHT 5kg 11 lbs VOLT HERTZ PRODUCT lt 8 x 107V Hz ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED Model 1751 Safety Test Leads User Manual Service Manual ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE 1050 Padded Carrying Case with handle and should strap 1754 Universal Test Lead Kit 2000 SCAN 10 Channel Scanner 2001 TCSCAN 9 Channel Thermocouple Scanner includes 1 channel reference junction 2010 EW 1 Year Warranty Extension 4288 1 Single Fixed Rack Mount Kit 4288 2 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 5804 4 Terminal Test Lead Set 5805 Kelvin Probes 5806 Kelvin Clip Lead Set 5807 7 Helical Spring Point Test Leads 7007 1 Shielded GPIB Cable 1m 3 2 ft 7007 2 Shielded GPIB Cable 2m 6 5 ft 7009 5 Shielded RS 232 Cable 1 5m 5 ft 8502 Trigger Link Adapter to 6 female BNC connector 8503 Trigger Link Cable to 2 Male BNCs 1m 3 2 ft 8605 High Performance Modular Test Leads 860
101. OISE DCV all ranges 7 2 4 3 5 100mV RANGE 10V RANGE DCI all ranges and 6426 30 27 l RATE DIGITS 10 sec 2min 10sec 2min NMRR CMRR 2 Ohms lt 10M range 6 24 50 44 5 PLC 7 100nV 1l0nV 1 1pV 1 2 uV 60 dB 140 dB 54 24 260 220 0 1 1 PLC 6 120 nV 125nV 1 3 pV 1 4 uV 60 dB 140 dB 544 490 440 0 1 0 1 PLC 5 1 9 yV 1 9 yV lipv 11 5 pV 80 dB 54 1000 1000 0 04 0 01 PLC 4 3 0 uV 2 9uV 135pV 139 pV 80 dB 44 2000 1800 0 01 DC NOTES DC SYSTEM SPEEDS 1 For the following ranges add 4ppm to the range accuracy specification 100mV 109 1009 10mA RANGE CHANGE 2 50 s 42 s FUNCTION CHANGE 2 45 s 38 s AUTORANGE TIME 22 lt 30ms lt 35ms ASCII READINGS TO RS 232 19 2K BAUD 55 s 55 s MAX INTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 2000 s 2000 s MAX EXTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 480 s 480 s RATIO SPEED 3 10 s 8 s DC GENERAL LINEARITY OF 10VDC RANGE 2ppm of reading 1ppm of range DCV TEMPERATURE CONTINUITY DIODE TEST INPUT PROTECTION 1000V all ranges MAXIMUM 4W LEAD RESISTANCE 5 of range per lead for 109 100Q and 1kQ ranges 1kQ per lead for all other ranges DC CURRENT INPUT PROTECTION 3A 250V fuse SHUNT RESISTOR 0 19 for 3A and 1A ranges 1Q for 100mA range 10Q for 10mA range CONTINUITY THRESHOLD Adjustable 19 to 1000 OVERRANGE 120 of range except on 1000V 3A and Diode OFFSET COMPENSATION Available for 10kQ and lower ranges only wn pe EERE so p 1
102. Parameter notes are located at the end of each table SCPI A checkmark V indicates that the command and its parameters are SCPI confirmed An unmarked command indicates that it is non SCPI SCPI confirmed commands that use one or more non SCPI parameters are explained by notes SCPI Command Reference 5 7 Table 5 2 CALCulate command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter CALCulate 1 Subsystem to control CALC 1 y FORMat lt name gt Select math format NONE MXB PERCent PERCent y FORMat Query math format y KMATh Path to configure math calculations MMFactor lt NRf gt Set m factor for mx b 100e6 to 100e6 1 MMFactor Query m factor MBFactor lt NRf gt Set b factor for mx b 100e6 to 100e6 0 MBFactor Query b factor MUNits lt name gt Specify units for mx b reading two characters A through MX D MUNits Query mx b units PERCent lt NRf gt Set target value for PERCent calculation 100e6 to 100e6 1 ACQuire Use input signal as target value PERCent Query percent STATe lt b gt Enable or disable kmath calculation Note y STATe Query state of kmath function y DATA Read result of kmath calculation y CALCulate2 Subsystem to control CALC 2 y FORMat lt name gt Select math format MEAN SDEViation MAXimum NONE y MINimum or NONE FORMat Query math format y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable calculation Note y STATe Query
103. R A PARTICULAR USE THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES NEITHER KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ITS INSTRUMENTS AND SOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SUCH EXCLUDED DAMAGES SHALL INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO COSTS OF REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION LOSSES SUSTAINED AS THE RESULT OF INJURY TO ANY PERSON OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY KEITHLEY Keithley Instruments Inc 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 www keithley com Sales Offices BELGIUM Bergensesteenweg 709 B 1600 Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 CHINA Yuan Chen Xin Building Room 705 12 Yumin Road Dewai Madian Beijing 100029 8610 82251886 Fax 8610 82251892 FINLAND Halsuantie 2 e 00420 Helsinki Finland 09 53 06 65 60 Fax 09 53 06 65 65 FRANCE 3 all e des Garays 91127 Palaiseau C dex 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26 GERMANY Landsberger Strasse 65 82110 Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 GREAT BRITAIN Unit 2 Commerce Park Brunel Road Theale Berkshire RG7 4AB e 0118 929 75 00 Fax 0118 929 75 19 INDIA 1 5 Eagles Street e Langford Town Bangalore 560 025 080 212 80 27 Fax 080 212 80 05 ITALY Viale S
104. RANGe Path to configure measurement range y UPPer lt n gt Select range 0 to 757 5 757 5 y UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO Query auto range y REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 757 5 to 757 5 0 y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe Query state of reference y ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value V DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 6 DIGits Query resolution AVERage Path to configure and control the filter TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note TCONtrol Query filter type COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter STATe Query state of digital filter OFF DETector Path to configure bandwidth BANDwidth lt NRf gt Specify bandwidth 3 to 300e3 30 BANDwidth Query bandwidth SCPI Command Reference 5 13 Table 5 6 cont SENSe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter VOLTage DC Path to configure DC voltage V NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate line cycles 0 01 to 10 1 y NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate y RANGe Path to configure measurement range y UPPer lt n gt Select range 0 to 1010 1000 y UPPer Query range V AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON V AUTO Query auto range y REFere
105. SCANNER SPEED MAXIMUM INTERNAL SCANNER RATES RANGE CHANNELS s TRIGGER DELAY 0 2 WIRE 4WIRE T C RTD DCV ACV 23 OHMS OHMS TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE All 105 All 96 All 102 lt 10MQ 55 All 70 All 2 TRIGGER DELAY AUTO 2 WIRE 4 WIRE T C RTD DCV ACV 23 OHMS OHMS TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE 0 1V 100 All 1 8 100 Q 82 100 Q 42 All 70 All 2 1V 100 1kQ 85 1kQ 42 10V 100 10 kQ 42 10 kQ 25 100V 70 100kQ2 28 100 kQ 21 1000V 70 1MQ 8 1MQ 7 10 MQ 5 10 MQ 5 100MQ 3 100 MQ 3 Internal Scanner Speed Notes 1 Speeds are for 60Hz or 50Hz operation using factory default operating conditions RST Auto Zero off Auto Range off Display off sample count 1024 2 NPLC 0 01 3 DETector BANDwidth 300 Triggering and Memory READING HOLD SENSITIVITY 0 01 0 1 1 or 10 of reading TRIGGER DELAY 0 to 99 hrs Ims step size EXTERNAL TRIGGER DELAY lt 1ms EXTERNAL TRIGGER JITTER lt 500p1s MEMORY 1024 readings Math Functions Rel Min Max Average StdDev of stored reading dB dBm Limit Test and mX b with user defined units displayed dBm REFERENCE RESISTANCES 1 to 9999Q in 1Q increments REMOTE INTERFACE Keithley 199 196 Emulation GPIB IEEE 488 2 and RS 232C SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments GENERAL POWER SUPPLY 100V 120V 220V 240V LINE FREQUENCY 50Hz to 60Hz and 440Hz automatically sensed at power up POWER CONSUMPTION 22VA OPERATING E
106. Select 642 digits 10 PLC filter ON up to 100 readings fixed range Temperature e Select 6 digits 10 PLC filter ON up to 100 readings Optimizing measurement speed The configurations listed below assume that the multimeter has had factory setups restored DC voltage DC current and resistance Select 3 digits 0 01 PLC filter OFF fixed range AC voltage and AC current Select 3 digits 0 01 PLC filter OFF fixed range Temperature e Select 3 digits 0 01 PLC filter OFF For all functions turn off the display and autozero and set the trigger delay to zero Use the SAMPle COUNt and READ bus commands A 12 Specifications Status and Error Messages B 2 Status and Error Messages Table B 1 Status and error messages Number Description Event 440 Query unterminated after indefinite response EE 430 Query deadlocked EE 420 Query unterminated EE 410 Query interrupted EE 363 Input buffer overrun SYS 350 Queue overflow SYS 330 Self test failed EE 314 Save recall memory lost EE 315 Configuration memory lost EE 285 Program syntax error EE 284 Program currently running EE 282 Illegal program name EE 281 Cannot create program EE 260 Expression error EE 241 Hardware missing EE 230 Data corrupt or stale EE 225 Out of memory EE 224 Illegal parameter value EE 223 Too much data EE 222 Parameter data out of range EE 221 Settings conflict EE 220 Parameter error EE 215 Arm d
107. T DC STERminals RANGe UPPer lt n gt Set measurement range for sense terminals Parameters lt n gt Oto3 1 Expected reading is amps ACI and DCI 0 to 757 5 Expected reading is AC volts ACV 0 to 1010 Expected reading in DC volts DCV 0 to 10 1 Expected reading in DC volts DCV for sense terminals 0 to 120e6 Expected reading is ohms 2 and 04 DEFault 3 03 ACI and DCI 757 5 ACV 1010 DCV 101e6 Q2 and Q4 MINimum 0 All functions MAXimum Same as DEFault Query RANGe UPPer Query measurement range RANGe UPPer DEFault Query RST default range RANGe UPPer MINimum Query lowest measurement range RANGe UPPer MAXimum Query highest measurement range Description This command is used to manually select the measurement range for the specified measurement function The range is selected by specifying the expected reading as an absolute value The Model 2010 will then go to the most sensitive range that will accommodate that expected reading For exam ple if you expect a reading of approximately 50mV simply let the parameter lt n gt 0 05 or 50e 3 in order to select the 100mV range 5 42 SCPI Command Reference AUTO lt b gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto range for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto range for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto range for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto ra
108. TaTIWaVd Add GYNDIANOD 110d TATIWaVd Ddd Das DDd dNOND dNOND GNVWWOD GNVWWOD ANVGNODAS AAYWINd OVD 9v7 N 09v dNOND dNOND dNOND dNOND ss3JAAY ssayaav GNVWWOD GNVYWWOD MIVL NILS IYSXJAINA aassaJaay ad o Inn SL O INN 2 Sl sn IS SL LILI So GE u oE U Yl N oE lt Yl Su OS vl oj t_ Lf wu 67 L Ww 67 l sD XD l L 0 L L 97 al 1 8z gt ZL S4 dd ZL ojo J LT LL gt LT LL Osa 1 LL Lf e odfu z 97 Z OL 97 OL ans 11 OL o t oj A j Gz A 6 l Gz 6 6 ads Wwa LOL LH 6 L o o jf x y v7 x 8 H i24 8 8 JdS NVO 149D sg 8 o o o t M 3 EZ M Z D EZ Z Z ald aq Z Lf L d o a A 9 d wz 9 9 9 NAS OV 9 O h EIO n IZ n s J IZ s s xNdd JYN Odd ONI s L oOo L 0 p 0z v a 0z v v pa 70d Dads 104 v olo o s b 6L S 9 6l 20 x14 Lf L oo 0 J q 81 A A g gL A A cod XLS z o ti ojo b e ZL fe L Vv ZL L L i oT Da 119 HOS L L oj 0 0 d 91 d 0 9L 0 0 dS yd INN 0 0 0 04 0 FMA tT TT TI T a Z W Z 2 9 v9 S WS r Wer se WE az Wz L WL o vo lt uunjod a a a fa sug gt gt gt 27 z7 Q L 0 amp 5 I amp 5 0 amp s I amp 5 0 S L Q 0 a L L B o g 0 5 I g 8 L 5 0 0 a L L n lt L n lt L n lt 0 n lt 0 0 8 0 q x x x x x X x a x ta IEEE 488 Bus Overview E 10 Figure E 3 Com
109. Tiate command generates an error and ignores the command See the FETCh command for more details Note that an Init ignored error will not cancel the execution of the FETCh command NOTE You cannot use the READ command if sample count gt l see Trigger Subsystem and there are readings stored in the buffer error 225 out of memory Either set sample count to one or clear the buffer See Appendix C for an example program using the READ command SCPI Command Reference 5 5 MEASure command MEASure lt function gt lt function gt CURRent AC AC current CURRent DC DC current VOLTage AC AC voltage VOLTage DC DC voltage RESistance Two wire resistance FRESistance Four wire resistance PERiod Period FREQuency Frequency TEMPerature Temperature DIODe Diode testing CONTinuity Continuity test Description This command combines all of the other signal oriented measurement commands to perform a one shot measurement and acquire the reading When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order that they are presented ABORt CONFigure lt function gt READ When ABORt is executed the instrument goes into the idle state if continuous initiation is disabled If continuous initiation is enabled the operation re starts at the beginning of the Trigger Model When CONFigure is executed the instrument goes into a one shot measurement mode See CONFigure for more details When READ
110. aar iEn i 3 8 Trigg r model sonnicnsinienisotnia ae 3 8 Reading hold autosettle 0 cee eeseeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 3 10 External triggering eis ccc cees cee ccuibereescsseresscuacusneuedestavanaveey 3 11 Buller operation S issar ia a 3 16 Storing readings sssisiiirsiiritii sisikii araia 3 16 Recalling readings 0 eee eeeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeeeeaeseeeeaeeeeeeaes 3 16 Buffer Statistics ainne ea aa E aN 3 17 Limit Operation cccses de ccne cad copete casesse evens i iii i 3 18 Setting limit VALUES sseseccessseressessasvvesseasacasesveservesranasvessass 3 18 Enabling Umits niesienia iiai 3 19 Scan Op rationS srities enion oreste nesar ip aeiia iaar i ani anioi 3 20 Scanning OVETVICW oo ee eeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeetseeeaeeseeeaeeeeeaeeseeens 3 20 Front panel scanner controls 0 0 eee eseeeeeseeseeereeeeeesees 3 20 Using the lt q and p keys oes ceeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeaeeeees 3 21 Using OPEN and CLOSE keys 0 eee eeeeseeseereeeeeeeees 3 21 Stepping and scanning trigger model additions 3 22 Using SHIFT CONHFIG to configure stepping ANG Scanning cissie riria 3 23 Scanning examples 0 eee eseeeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeeseeens 3 24 System Operations soriire sirrini aiii ei 3 30 S E E EEE E 3 30 Calibration suiriri n e a aE EEE aN 3 30 Remote Operation ntrod ctoM niina a a 4 2 Selecting an interf te 5 seasevessssds tices satayesseniucagsts sas dteessanssvnieseeiaredes 4 2 RS2232 cescssessstessevdver
111. ace selection is stored in non volatile memory it does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Before you select a remote interface consider the programming language you want to use NOTE Changing the interface GPIB to RS 232 or RS 232 to GPIB will clear the data buffer RS 232 You can connect a controller to the RS 232 interface Some considerations for selecting the RS 232 interface are e You must define the baud rate enable or disable software handshake XON XOF e You can only use the SCPI programming language with the RS 232 interface To select RS 232 as the remote interface perform the following 1 Access the RS 232 configuration by pressing SHIFT then RS232 You see RS232 OFF 2 Move to the on off selection by pressing the key You see the OFF selection blinking 3 Turn on the RS 232 interface by toggling the selection to ON using the V or A key and press ENTER You can exit the configuration menu by pressing EXIT Remote Operation 4 3 GPIB bus The GPIB bus is the IEEE 488 interface You must select a unique address for the Model 2010 multimeter The address is displayed when the multimeter is turned on At the factory the address is set to 16 Since GPIB is the interface selection defined by the factory only follow these steps to select the GPIB interface if you have been previously using the RS 232 remote programming interface 1 Select the GPIB option by pressing SHI
112. ads from the SENSE HI and LO terminals to the reference source CAUTION Donot apply more than 1000V peak to the INPUT terminals or more than 350V peak to the SENSE terminals or instrument damage may occur 9 Observe the display If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until an on scale reading is displayed or press AUTO for autoranging Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 10 Take readings from the display NOTE To use autorange with the RATIO function the following applies When both RATIO and SENSE IN are turned on the display will show RS the AUTO key applies to the sense inputs When RATIO is on and SENSE IN is off display will show RA the AUTO key applies to the input terminals To have autorange apply to both functions go into each function first and select AUTO before RATIO ON is enabled Basic Measurements 2 21 Measuring voltage with the SENSE terminals The SENSE terminals can be used to measure DC voltage in the 100mV 1V and 10V ranges Assuming factory default conditions make the connections as follows 1 Connect test leads to the SENSE HI and LO terminals Either the front or rear inputs can be used place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position 2 Connect SENSE LO to LO SENSE LO and LO cannot have a voltage difference of greater than 5 of the lowest range selected Press DCV 4 Press SHIFT then RATIO Use the A V lt and gt keys to toggle RATIO
113. age must be received by the computer before another program message can be sent to the Model 2010 4 34 Remote Operation Common commands Common commands summarized in Table 4 4 are device commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Table 4 4 IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries Mnemonic Name Description CLS Clear status Clears all event registers and Error Queue ESE lt NRf gt Event enable command Program the Standard Event Enable Register ESE Event enable query Read the Standard Event Enable Register ESR Event status register query Read the Standard Event Enable Register and clear it IDN Identification query Returns the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels of the unit OPC Operation complete command Set the Operation Complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register after all pending commands have been executed OPC Operation complete query Places an ASCII 1 into the output queue when all pending selected device operations have been completed OPT Option identification query Returns an ID code that indicates which memory option is installed and whether or not the optional scanner card is installed RCL lt NRf gt Recall command Returns the Model 2010 to the setup configuration stored in the specified memory location RST Reset command Returns the Model 2010 to the RST default cond
114. alculated readings in buffer NONE Put no readings in buffer Query FEED Query buffer feed Description This command is used to select the source of readings to be placed in the buffer With SENSe 1 selected raw readings are placed in the buffer when storage is performed With CALCulate 1 selected calculated math readings MX B or PERCent or NONE are placed in the buffer With NONE selected no readings are placed in the buffer when storage is performed over the bus CONTrol lt name gt TRACe FEED CONTrol lt name gt Specify buffer control Parameters lt name gt NEVer Disables buffer storage NEXT Fills buffer and stops Query CONTrol Query buffer control Description This command is used to select the buffer control With NEVer selected storage into the buffer is disabled With either of the other selections storage is performed as long as buffer feed is not set for NONE see TRACe FEED NONE When NEXT is selected the storage process starts fills the buffer and then stops The buffer size is specified by the POINts command DATA command DATA TRACe DATA Send buffer readings Description When this command is sent and the Model 2010 is addressed to talk all the readings stored in the buffer are sent to the computer The format that readings are sent over the bus is controlled by the FORMat subsystem SCPI Command Reference 5 73 Trigger subsystem The Trigger subsystem is made up of a series of co
115. all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a common operation such as reset The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted SCPI commands SCPI commands are commands that are particular to each device on the bus These commands are designated by the instrument manufacturer and are based on the instrument model defined by the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Consortium s SCPI standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a particular operation such as setting a range or closing a relay The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted Command codes Command codes for the various commands that use the data lines are summarized in Figure E 3 Hexadecimal and the decimal values for the various commands are listed in Table E 2 Table E 2 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes Command Hex value Decimal value GTL 01 1 SDC 04 4 GET 08 8 LLO 11 17 DCL 14 20 SPE 18 24 SPD 19 25 LAG 20 3F 32 63 TAG 40 5F 64 95 SCG 60 7F 96 127 UNL 3F 63 UNT 5F 95 aed 1 U0q X 801A d LOI d 30N OLOZ aPOW Aq pau w jdw ou TOYLNOD IAVL LOL pue AYNDIANOONN 110d
116. an Gimignano 38 20146 Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 30 22 74 JAPAN New Pier Takeshiba North Tower 13F 11 1 Kaigan 1 chome Minato ku Tokyo 105 0022 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 KOREA 2FL URI Building 2 14 Yangjae Dong Seocho Gu Seoul 137 888 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 NETHERLANDS Postbus 559 4200 AN Gorinchem 0183 63 53 33 Fax 0183 63 08 21 SWEDEN c o Regus Business Centre Frosundaviks All 15 4tr e 16970 Solna 08 50 90 46 00 Fax 08 655 26 10 TAIWAN 13F 3 NO 6 Lane 99 Pu Ding Road Hsinchu Taiwan ROC 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 5 03 Model 2010 Multimeter User s Manual 1996 Keithley Instruments Inc All rights reserved Cleveland Ohio U S A Fifth Printing August 2003 Document Number 2010 900 01 Rev E Manual Print History The print history shown below lists the printing dates of all Revisions and Addenda created for this manual The Revision Level letter increases alphabetically as the manual undergoes subsequent updates Addenda which are released between Revisions contain important change information that the user should incorporate immediately into the manual Addenda are numbered sequentially When a new Revision is created all Addenda associated with the previous Revision of the manual are incorporated into the new Revision of the manual Each new Revision includes a revised copy of this print history page Revision A Document Num
117. an be as long as 12 characters A space counts as a character Excess message characters results in an error STATe lt b gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT STATe lt b gt Control on off message Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable text message 1 or ON Enable text message Query STATe Query state of message mode Description This command enables and disables the text message mode When enabled a defined message is displayed When disabled the message is removed from the display A user defined text message remains displayed only as long as the instrument is in remote Taking the instrument out of remote by pressing the LOCAL key or sending LOCAL 16 cancels the message and disables the text message mode 5 28 SCPI Command Reference FORMat subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to select the data format for transferring instrument readings over the bus The BORDer command and DATA command only affect readings transferred from the buffer i e SENSE DATA or CALC DATA are always sent in ASCII These commands are summarized in Table 5 4 DATA command Figure 5 1 ASCII data format DATA lt type gt FORMat DATA lt type gt Specify data format Parameters lt type gt ASCii ASCII format SREal TEEE754 single precision format DREal TEEE754 double precision format Query DATA Query data format Description This command is used to select the data format for transferring readings over the bus For ever
118. and any case combination Examples RST rst DATA data SYSTem PRESet system preset Long form and short form versions A SCPI command word can be sent in its long form or short form version The command subsystem tables in Section 5 are in the long form version However the short form version is indicated by upper case characters SYSTem PRESet long form SYST PRES short form SYSTem PRES long form and short form combination Note that each command word must be in either long form or short form For example SYSTe PRESe is illegal and will generate an error The command will not be executed 4 30 Remote Operation Short form rules Use the following rules to determine the short form version of any SCPI command If the length of the command word is four letters or less no short form version exists auto auto These rules apply to command words that exceed four letters e If the fourth letter of the command word is a vowel delete it and all the letters after it immediate imm e Rule exception The short form version of the following command uses only the first two letters of the word TCouple tc If the fourth letter of the command word is a consonant retain it but drop all the letters after it format form Ifthe command contains a question mark or a non optional number included in the command word you must include it in the short form version delay del e Command words or
119. and fire replacement components in mains circuits including the power transformer test leads and input jacks must be purchased from Keithley Instruments Standard fuses with applicable national safety approvals may be used if the rating and type are the same Other components that are not safety related may be purchased from other suppliers as long as they are equivalent to the original component Note that selected parts should be purchased only through Keithley Instruments to maintain accuracy and functionality of the product If you are unsure about the applicability of a replacement component call a Keithley Instruments office for information To clean an instrument use a damp cloth or mild water based cleaner Clean the exterior of the instrument only Do not apply cleaner directly to the instrument or allow liquids to enter or spill on the instrument Products that consist of a circuit board with no case or chassis e g data acquisition board for installation into a computer should never require cleaning if handled accord ing to instructions If the board becomes contaminated and operation is affected the board should be returned to the factory for proper cleaning servicing Table of Contents 1 General Information TiO MUCH ON ersi erreren i a ia 1 2 Feat te ovVervieW uictiscectvescacesascesittedseeatietees eaudbiveiiesnieretdecos 1 2 Warranty information sesessseseseeseeeresesrssesrertsrestrsrsresrerenresrerenne 1 3 Man al
120. andshake sequence ees eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees E 5 Command codes nosnici ieie E 10 List of Tables 2 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 4 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 5 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 B Table B 1 D Table D 1 Table D 2 Basic Measurements F setatingS nananman e AA S 2 9 FACtOry d fauliS sssrinin aeiia e 2 13 Measurement Options Rate settings for the measurement functions 1 0 3 7 Auto delay settings oo eis eseesecesecseeeeeseseaeceeeesesneeeseenaes 3 9 Bus commands parameters for stepping and scanning Counters oo eee eseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseceeeeaeseeeeseeeee 3 25 Remote Operation Language SUpport ccc cc ccsceaseeceesesssetdaeseeeseesuscesseutveesvenesseeeans 4 3 RS 232 connector PINOUE oo eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeteeeeaeenees 4 7 General bus commands and associated statements 4 12 TEEE 488 2 common commands and queries 0 4 34 SCPI Command Reference Signal oriented measurement command summary 5 2 CALCulate command summary 00 eee eeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 5 7 DISPlay command summary ceseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 5 8 FORMat command summary ceseeeeseeeeereeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeees 5 9 ROUTe command summary eee eeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeees 5 9 SENSe command summary
121. annel to open and allow a settling time before closing the selected channel Channel relays will be closed according to the presently selected function If a four wire function is selected both the selected channel relay and the matching relay pair will be closed Fixed four pole relay pairs are e 1 and 6 not available for Model 2001 TCSCAN e 2and7 e 3and8 e 4and9 e 5and 10 Pressing the OPEN key will immediately open any closed scanner card channel or channel pair for four wire resistance 3 22 Measurement Options Stepping and scanning trigger model additions The trigger model presented in Trigger operations earlier in this section has some additional capabilities when stepping or scanning These are outlined below Timer With this control source event detection is immediately satisfied on the initial pass Each subsequent detection is satisfied when the programmed timer interval up to 99H 99M 99 99S elapses e Reading counter For both stepping and scanning the reading count can be entered from SHIFT CONFIG This is referred to as the trigger counter over the bus The reading counter can bypass the idle state Operation will wait until the programmed control source event occurs e Channel counter For scanning the scan list length maximum channel less minimum channel is used to bypass the control source allowing a specified number of device actions to occur This counter is referred to as the sampl
122. anning counters for bus commands are summarized in Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Bus commands parameters for stepping and scanning counters Operation SAMPle COUNt TRIGger COUNt STEP 1 reading count SCAN scan list length reading count scan list length 3 26 Measurement Options Timing Another configuration option for stepping and scanning is the timing of channel closures The example in Figure 3 15 shows how different settings of TIMER and DELAY affect these operations These are the timer control source and the delay block shown in the trigger models in Figure 3 12 and Figure 3 13 e With the timer ON and set to five seconds and delay set to AUTO channels are stepped through at five second intervals with an output trigger after each closure A scan operation yields ten channels scanned immediately with an output trigger at the end of the scan With the timer OFF and the delay set to MANual for five seconds stepping and scanning through the channels is timed the same The difference is in the number of output triggers with stepping sending a trigger after each channel closure and scanning sending a trigger at the end of the scan When using both the timer and delay parameters the timer is not started until after the delay For example if the timer is two minutes and the delay is ten seconds the timer is not started until ten seconds after pressing SCAN Each successive scan will occur at 2 10 0 4 10 0 etc
123. asecoaisaceandesbenascasenssbouesvensvtaasess 2 28 Connections siniseryoso ins KE bead esate eewees 2 29 Measuring temperature eee eeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeecseseeeeaeeneeeaes 2 30 Connections sei sei cet acteeessdesducceaceseaaditeseniossuaey eda aiiai 2 31 Configuration csornai ie E tens doaseny 2 32 Math serenite aa eaea o a a eee 2 32 1na Da Se o EE E E A 2 33 Perc nt sisone e E R i 2 34 dBm lc lation sses isnon a 2 34 dB calc l f on snneransuninianni based ibe este geese 2 35 Measuring continuity sessesesesesesreesssrsresreresresreresreresresresrsresreee 2 36 Connections nesosita iire iak E inn nii o e NNN 2 36 Threshold resistance level ssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeerersreresrererreeee 2 36 Testing diod S nosiiesrie aiieieo aaan 2 37 COMMCCHONS iss cesceisdastesestcvesetacsheredieiasisoadursvossalseagesansecnasen 2 37 RAN GC ss siesccseniie dine sehasceatingeenscivuctaep wall duns busts tedesedeediinees 2 37 Measurement Options Introd ction sichcie ll seicetesedesbes eve etienastaises ibe dactest edit eleadeei estes 3 2 Measurement Configuration cece essceeeeseeeseseeeeseeseeeaeeseeeaees 3 2 RAGS canann iueedicpeseunveetvsbesteyesuee E EERE ETE 3 2 Filer eienares sranani eR E 3 3 Relative scsensniinnsanireni i e eaeeeenstes 3 5 DU GUUS os sii vecigdssacesaitbelasevensidnasspsssuceitabssdissdeseudonedsuavescusstoaendees 3 5 Rat ra E EEEN e EE EATER AEE 3 6 Trigger operations sssssessiestirsipeeoaraori ns neen KEE EEEE i
124. asurements ega Sasiia o gaH 2001 TCSCAN m cH2 eHe El jo 7 El jo il jo ll o E jo El o Note This thermocouple card Eo i Ella must be inserted into a El o Keithley Model 2010 bl O Note Front or rear inputs can be used f o OUTAHI OUT A LO A Thermocouple Connections Sense Q4 wire HI Model 2010 l put RI Platinum eSSSSSseessss RTD e aaaaapDaa oo eeeeeeeee 4 eo S Sense Q4 wire LO B 4 Wire RTD Connections 2 31 2 32 Basic Measurements Configuration Math The following provides the various configuration options for temperature measurements To select and configure either a thermocouple or four wire RTD measurement Press SHIFT then SENSOR Four choices are available using the A and W keys UNITS C K F Centigrade Kelvin Fahrenheit This parameter selects the displayed units for temperature measurements e SENSOR TCOUPLE 4W RTD sensor type This parameter selects the type of sensor being used TYPE J N T K thermocouple type or PT100 USER PT3916 PT385 F100 D100 4W RTD type Note that with USER selected you must set the Alpha Beta Delta and RZero values from over the GPIB bus or the RS 232 Interface see USER RTD Type for details e JUNC SIM CH1 simulated or referenced at Channel 1 Typically a thermocouple card uses a single reference junction The Model 2010 can simulate a reference junction temperature or
125. at a Signal Oriented Measurement Command parameter has been ignored NOTE Whenever a questionable event occurs the ERR annunciator will turn on The annunciator will turn off when the questionable event clears Figure 5 5 Questionable event Bit Position B15 B14 B13 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO register Event Warn Cal Temp ighti 16 384 256 16 Decimal Weighting 314 28 24 Value 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Value 1 Questionable Event Bit Set Events Warn Command Warning 0 Questionable Event Bit Cleared Cal Calibration Summary Temp Temperature Summary Figure 5 6 Operation event register Bit Position Event Decimal Weighting Value Operation Event Register Bits BO through B3 Not used SCPI Command Reference Bit B4 Measuring Meas Set bit indicates that the instrument is performing a measurement 5 57 Bit B5 Triggering Trig Set bit indicates that the instrument is in the Device Action block of the Trigger Model Bits B6 through B9 Not used Bit B10 Idle Set bit indicates that the instruments in the idle state Bits B11 through B15 Not used B15 B14 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Idle Trig Meas 1024 32 E p S SS 210 25 24 0 0 1 O 1 O 1
126. at a device dependent error and command error have occurred Figure 4 14 Standard event status register Remote Operation 4 37 The bits of the Standard Event Status Register are described as follows Bit BO Operation Complete A set bit indicates that all pending selected device operations are completed and the Model 2010 is ready to accept new commands This bit only sets in response to the OPC query command Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Query Error QYE A set bit indicates that you attempted to read data from an empty Output Queue Bit B3 Device Dependent Error DDE A set bit indicates that an instrument operation did not execute properly due to some internal condition Bit B4 Execution Error EXE A set bit indicates that the Model 2010 detected an error while trying to execute a command Bit B5 Command Error CME A set bit indicates that a command error has occurred Command errors include TEEE 488 2 syntax error Model 2010 received a message that does not follow the defined syntax of the IEEE 488 2 standard e Semantic error Model 2010 received a command that was misspelled or received an optional IEEE 488 2 command that is not implemented The instrument received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a program message Bit B6 User Request URQ A set bit indicates that the LOCAL key on the Model 2010 front panel was pressed Bit B7 Power ON PON A set bit indicates t
127. at it transmits to the controller with any combination of lt CR gt and lt LF gt Perform the following steps to set the terminator 1 Access the RS 232 configuration by pressing SHIFT and then RS232 You see RS 232 ON assuming you have already selected the RS 232 interface 2 Go to the terminator field by using the A or W key You see TX TERM lt terminator gt 3 Access the terminator options by pressing the key You see the terminator selection blinking 4 Use the A or W key to display the desired terminator LF CR CRLF or LFCR and press ENTER The instrument will return to the measurement mode Remote Operation 4 7 RS 232 connections The RS 232 serial port can be connected to the serial port of a controller i e personal computer using a straight through RS 232 cable terminated with DB 9 connectors Do not use a null modem cable The serial port uses the transmit TXD receive RXD and signal ground GND lines of the RS 232 standard It does not use the hardware handshaking lines CTS and RTS Figure 4 1 shows the rear panel connector for the RS 232 interface and Table 4 2 shows the pinout for the connector If your computer uses a DB 25 connector for the RS 232 interface you will need a cable or adapter with a DB 25 connector on one end and a DB 9 connector on the other wired straight through not null modem Figure 4 1 54321 RS 232 interface connector T 9876 RS232 Rear Panel Connector
128. ative value is in effect when dB is selected the value is converted to dB then REL is applied to dB If REL is applied after dB has been selected dB has REL applied to it Configuration To set the reference voltage perform the following steps 1 After selecting dB the voltage applied between HI and LO is acquired and presented as the reference voltage This level can then be adjusted REF 1 000000 2 To change the reference level use the lt q and keys to select the numeric position Then use the A and W keys to select the desired value Move the cursor to the rightmost position and use the A and W keys to move the decimal point Be sure to press ENTER after changing the reference voltage NOTE The largest negative value of dB is 160dB This will accommodate a ratio of Vin 10uV and VREF 1000V 2 36 Basic Measurements Measuring continuity The Model 2010 uses the 1k range to measure circuit continuity After selecting continuity the unit prompts you for a threshold resistance level 1Q 1000Q The Model 2010 alerts you with a beep when a reading is below the set level To measure the continuity of a circuit press SHIFT then CONT set the threshold resistance level and connect the circuit NOTE Continuity has a non selectable reading rate of FAST 0 1 PLC Connections Connect the circuit you want to test to the INPUT HI and INPUT LO terminals of the Model 2010 The test current flows from the INPUT HI as show
129. aution Maximum Input 1000V peak Maximum Common Mode 500V peak Model 2010 rd AC Voltage Source ESSESSESES SET 0 aa 2 a2 aeS 00000000E as Input Impedence 1MQ in parallel with lt 100pF Caution Maximum Input 750V RMS 1000V peak 8 x 107 Ve Hz Maximum Common Mode 500V peak Crest factor AC voltage and current accuracies are affected by the crest factor of the waveform the ratio of the peak value to the RMS value 500Hz is the maximum fundamental frequency at which the corresponding crest factor must be taken into account for accuracy calculations Low level considerations For sensitive measurements external considerations beyond the Model 2010 affect the accuracy Effects not noticeable when working with higher voltages are significant in microvolt signals The Model 2010 reads only the signal received at its input therefore it is important that this signal be properly transmitted from the source The following paragraphs indicate factors that affect accuracy including stray signal pick up and thermal offsets 2 18 Basic Measurements Shielding AC voltages that are extremely large compared with the DC signal to be measured may produce an erroneous output Therefore to minimize AC interference the circuit should be shielded with the shield connected to the Model 2010 INPUT LO particularly for low level sources Improper shielding can cause the Model 2010 to behave i
130. beep is sounded if enabled and the reading is considered a true measurement The reading is held on the display until an out of window reading occurs to restart the hold process When operating remotely or scanning the hold process seeks a new seed once it has been satisfied and the reading has been released When operating from the front panel the hold process does not seek a new seed until the held condition is removed Measurement Options 3 11 Hold example 1 Enable HOLD select a window percentage and enter a count Apply test probes to a signal Once the signal becomes stable enough to satisfy the hold condition the reading is released and the beeper sounds if enabled 3 Remove the hold condition by lifting the probes Hold will then seek a new seed External triggering The EXT TRIG key selects triggering from two external sources trigger link and the TRIG key When EXT TRIG is pressed the TRIG annunciator lights and dashes are displayed to indicate the instrument is waiting for an external trigger From the front panel press the TRIG key to trigger a single reading Pressing the EXT TRIG key again toggles back to continuous triggers The Model 2010 uses two lines of the Trigger Link rear panel connector as External Trigger EXT TRIG input and Voltmeter Complete VMC output The EXT TRIG line allows the Model 2010 to be triggered by other instruments The VMC line allows the Model 2010 to
131. ber 2010 900 01 ccceccesseessesseeseeseeseeseeeeesseeseeeeesseesees Revision B Document Number 2010 900 01 ccccscessesseesseseeeseesecseceeeeseeseeeseeeeeee Addendum B Document Number 2010 900 02 ccscessecesseseeseeeeseeeeeeeteeseeeeeeeaee Revision C Document Number 2010 900 01 ccecccsscssesseessessessesseeseceeeesesseceseeseeeeeees Revision D Document Number 2010 900 01 eeeesesseseeseseeeeceeeeseeseeecseeaeeeseeeaeeaeeeeaees Revision E Document Number 2010 900 01 oo eeeeseecesseseeeeeeseeeeeecneeseeeseeeaeeaeeeeaees All Keithley product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of Keithley Instruments Inc Other brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders February 1996 September 1996 KEUS Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read and follow all installation operation and maintenance information carefully before using the product Refer to the manual for complete product specifications If the product is used in a manner not specified the
132. ble 5 9 STRACe DATA The bar l indicates that TRACe or DATA can be used as the root command for this subsystem From this point on the documentation in this manual uses TRACe If you prefer to use DATA simply replace all the TRACe command words with DATA CLEar command CLEar TRACe CLEar Clear buffer Description This action command is used to clear the buffer of readings If you do not clear the buffer a subsequent store will overwrite the old readings If the subsequent store is aborted before the buffer becomes full you could end up with some old readings still in the buffer FREE command FREE TRACe FREE Read status of memory Description This command is used to read the status of storage memory After sending this command and addressing the Model 2010 to talk two values separated by commas are sent to the computer The first value indicates how many bytes of memory are available and the second value indicates how many bytes are reserved to store readings POINts command PPOINts lt NRf gt TRACe POINts lt NRf gt Specify buffer size Parameter lt n gt 2 to 1024 Query POINts Query the buffer size Description This command is used to specify the size of the buffer 5 72 SCPI Command Reference FEED command FEED lt name gt TRACe FEED lt name gt Specify readings source Parameters lt name gt SENSe 1 Put raw readings in buffer CALCulate 1 Put c
133. command TRIGGER just sends GET Any other listeners are triggered when the command is executed SPE SPD serial polling Use the serial polling sequence to obtain the Model 2010 serial poll byte The serial poll byte contains important information about internal functions Generally the serial polling sequence is used by the controller to determine which of several instruments has requested service with the SRQ line However the serial polling sequence may be performed at any time to obtain the status byte from the Model 2010 Multimeter Program fragment PRINT 1 spoll 16 Serial poll the 2010 INPUT 2 S Read serial poll byte PRINT S Display the decimal value of the serial poll byte Remote Operation 4 15 Front panel GPIB operation The following paragraphs describe aspects of the front panel that are part of GPIB operation including messages status indicators and the LOCAL key Error and status messages See Section 2 for a list of error and status messages associated with IEEE 488 programming The instrument can be programmed to generate an SRQ and command queries can be performed to check for specific error conditions GPIB status indicators The REM remote TALK talk LSTN listen and SRQ service request annunciators show the GPIB bus status Each of these indicators is described below REM This indicator shows when the instrument is in the remote state REM does not necessarily indicate the stat
134. cription This query command is used to determine which channels on the internal scanner card are closed After sending this command and addressing the instrument to talk a list of all closed channels is sent to the computer SCPI Command Reference 5 35 OPEN lt list gt ROUTe MULTiple OPEN lt list gt Open specified channels Parameter lt list gt chanlist Specify channels to open where chanlist is the list of channels 1 through 11 to be opened Description This command is used to open specified channels on the internal scanner SCAN commands card When this command is sent the channels specified in the chanlist will open Channel 11 is the 2 pole 4 pole relay Opening channel 11 selects the 4 pole operating mode Examples of a list list 1 3 5 Channels 1 3 and 5 1 5 Channels 1 through 5 INTernal lt list gt ROUTe SCAN INTernal lt list gt Define internal scan list and enable scan Parameter lt list gt scanlist Query Description where scanlist is the specified list of channels 1 through 10 to be scanned INTernal Query programmed scan list This command is used to define the scan list for the internal scanner card The scan list can contain two to ten channels The following examples demonstrate the various forms for expressing a scan list list 2 3 4 Channels separated by commas 1 8 Range of channels 1 through 8 Range limits separated by a colon
135. ction This looping action continues until the specified number 2 to 100 of valid hold readings readings within the window has occurred If one of the hold readings is not within the window then the instrument acquires a new seed reading and repeats the hold process After the hold is released an audible beep is sounded to signal a valid measurement The use of hold is explained in Section 3 If the instrument is performing a step or scan the next task for device action is to open the previous channel if closed and close the next channel If the filter hold feature and scanning are disabled the device action would be a single reading conversion Remote Operation 4 27 Programming syntax The following paragraphs cover syntax for both common commands and SCPI commands For more information see the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI standards Command words Program messages are made up of one or more command words Commands and command parameters Common commands and SCPI commands may or may not use a parameter The following are some examples SAV lt NRf gt Parameter NRf required RST No parameter used SINITiate CONTinuous lt b gt Parameter lt b gt required SYSTem PRESet No parameter used Put at least one space between the command word and the parameter e Brackets Some command words are enclosed in brackets These brackets are used to denote an optional command word that does not need to be included in
136. d no CALC2 calculation is performed With any of the other formats selected and CALC2 enabled see STATe the calculation is performed each time the MMediate or MMediate command is executed SCPI Command Reference 5 23 STATE lt b gt CALCulate2 STATe lt b gt Control CALC2 Parameters lt b gt 0 or off Disable CALC2 calculation 1 or on Enable CALC2 calculation Query STATe Query state on or off of CALC2 Description This command is used to enable or disable the CALC2 calculation When en abled the selected CALC2 format will be calculated when the MMediate or MMediate command is executed IMMediate CALCulate2 IMMediate Perform CALC2 Query IMMediate Perform calculation and read result equivalent to CALCulate2 IMMediate DATA Description The IMMediate command is used to perform the selected CALC2 operation on the readings in the buffer assuming CALC2 is enabled see STATe After performing the calculation the result can be read by using the CALCulate2 DATA query command Another way to perform the calculation and read the result is to use the query form of the command MMediate When this command is sent the calculation is performed and the result is queried Program This example assumes that there are readings stored in the buffer and that CALC72 is enabled PRINT 1 output 02 calc2 form max Select format PRINT 1 output 02 calc2 imm Perform math and query result
137. d in Section 3 The procedure to select and configure a math operation is 1 Press SHIFT then the appropriate math key 2 Configure the parameters for the math operation Press ENTER when finished Press SHIFT then the related math function to end the calculation NOTES Once enabled for a function the mX b and percentage calculations are in effect across function changes The Model 2010 uses IEEE 754 floating point format for math calculations mX b This math operation lets you manipulate normal display readings X mathematically according to the following calculation Y mX b where X is the normal display reading m and b are user entered constants for scale factor and offset Y is the displayed result Configuration To configure the mX b calculation perform the following steps 1 Press SHIFT then MX B to display the present scale factor M 1 000000 2 Enter a value and units prefix Use the lt and keys to choose a numerical place and use the A and W keys to increment or decrement the digits 3 Press ENTER to confirm the M value and display the B value B 00 00000 m 4 Enter a value and units prefix 5 Press ENTER to confirm the B value and display the UNITS designation MX 6 Scroll through the letters to change and press ENTER when finished The Model 2010 will display the result of the calculation 2 34 Basic Measurements Percent Percent selects the percentage calculation and lets y
138. d in Table 5 8 BEEPer command STATe lt b gt SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper Parameters lt b gt lorON Enable beeper Oor OFF Disable beeper Query STATe Query state of beeper Description This command is used to enable or disable the beeper for limit tests PRESet command PRESet SYSTem PRESet Return to SYSTem PRESet defaults Description This command returns the instrument to states optimized for front panel operation SYSTem PRESet defaults are listed in the SCPI tables Table 5 2 through Table 5 11 KCLick command KCLick lt b gt SYSTem KCLick lt b gt Enable or disable keyclick Parameters lt b gt lorON Enable keyclick Oor OFF Disable keyclick Query KCLick Query status of keyclick Description This command is used to enable or disable the keyclick The keyclick can also be enabled or disabled from the front panel by pressing SHIFT then LOCAL SCPI Command Reference 5 65 POSetup lt name gt command POSetup lt name gt SYSTem POSetup lt name gt Program power on defaults Parameters lt name gt RST Select RST defaults on power up PRESet Select SYSTem PRESet defaults on power up SAVO Select saved defaults on power up Query POSetup Query power on setup Description This command is used to select the power on defaults With RST selected the instrument powers up to the RST default conditions With PRES selected the instrument powers up to the SYStem PRESet
139. d places operation at point B in the flowchart For the first pass through the model the scanner does not wait at point B for a trigger Instead it closes the first channel After the relay settles the Model 7001 7002 outputs a Channel Ready pulse Since the instrument is programmed to scan ten channels operation loops back up to point B where it waits for an input trigger Measurement Options 3 15 and F The Model 2010 operation is at point A waiting for a trigger The output Channel Ready pulse from the Model 7001 7002 triggers the multimeter to measure DUT 1 point E After the measurement is complete the Model 2010 outputs a completion pulse point F and then loops back to point A where it waits for another input trigger The trigger applied to the Model 7001 7002 from the Model 2010 closes the next channel in the scan This triggers the multimeter to measure the next DUT The process continues until all ten channels are scanned and measured External triggering with BNC connections An adapter cable is available to connect the micro DIN Trigger Link of the Model 2010 to instruments with BNC trigger connections The Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable has a micro DIN connector at one end and two BNC connectors at the other end The BNC cables are labeled VMC trigger line 1 and EXT TRIG trigger line 2 Figure 3 9 shows how a Keithley Model 706 Scanner can be connected to the Trigger Link of the Model 2010 u
140. daceetieessiddsivees cues ursasteducnevedeatecduveress 4 2 GPIB BUS sirean aaea bent Slane wees 4 3 Selecting a language 0 ee ee es sierici 4 3 SCPI seirer i rin a E E dens isvacedeasideatednenranestandncays 4 4 Keithley Models 196 199 Digital Multimeter 1 00 4 4 RS 232 operation seieren tinner asese E rer ran aR 4 5 Sending and receiving data eseseeeeseeeereereerrsrrrrsrrreerrsreens 4 5 Selecting Dau Tate seroiisisises irrien saini 4 5 Selecting signal handshaking flow control 0 0 eee 4 6 Setting terminator oe eee eeeeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeenaes 4 6 RS 232 COMMECTIONS 2 0 ceeesseeseesonetereeeeseeescerersenereeeeeeens 4 7 Etror MCSSASES orsoni scans ease iecned teas tieadeanavspastageneuns 4 7 GPIB bus operation and reference 00 eee eeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 8 ntrod Gtion csie ieir snie ariaa Ra EA 4 8 GPIB bus standards 00 0 eee eseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeaeenees 4 8 GPIB bus CONNECTIONS 00 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeenees 4 8 Selecting the primary address 0 0 eee eseseeeseeeeeeneeeeeens 4 10 QuickBASIC 4 5 programming eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 General Bus Commands 00 0 eeeeceesseeeeeereeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 4 12 Front panel GPIB operation 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 4 15 STATUS SIHUCHUINS cccccs ceeds a a a ea aSa 4 16 Condition TESISLENS sci sesccsesrcecavascaeedurssueres cece ssooecsvonsscoasens 4 17 Eyent registers ecssctectesiedechee decease
141. default conditions Default conditions are listed in the SCPI tables Table 5 2 through Table 5 11 With the SAVO parameter selected the instrument powers on to the setup that is saved in the specified location using the SAV command FRSWitch SYSTem FRSWitch Read INPUTS switch Description This query command is used to read the position of the FRONT REAR INPUTS switch Switch position code is defined as follows 1 Front panel inputs selected 0 Rear panel inputs selected VERSion command VERSion SYSTem VERSion Read SCPI version Description This query command is used to read the version of the SCPI standard being used by the Model 2010 Example code 1991 0 The above response message indicates the version of the SCPI standard 5 66 SCPI Command Reference ERRor command sERRor SYSTem ERRor Description Read Error Queue As error and status messages occur they are placed in the Error Queue This query command is used to read those messages The Error Queue is a first in first out FIFO register that can hold up to ten messages Each time you read the queue the oldest message is read and that message is then removed from the queue If the queue becomes full the 350 Queue Overflow message occupies the last memory location in the register On power up the queue is empty When the Error Queue is empty the 0 No error message is placed in the Error Queue The messages
142. dle The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not performing any measurements or scanning functions From the front panel the unit is considered idle at the end of a step or scan operation when the reading for the last channel remains displayed To restore triggers use the SHIFT HALT keys Once the Model 2010 is taken out of idle operation proceeds through the flowchart Control source and event detection The control source holds up operation until the programmed event occurs and is detected The control sources are described as follows Immediate With this control source event detection is immediately satisfied allowing operation to continue e External Event detection is satisfied for any of the following three conditions e An input trigger via the Trigger Link line EXT TRIG is received e A bus trigger GET or TRG is received e The front panel TRIG key is pressed The Model 2010 must be taken out of remote before it will respond to the TRIG key Use the LOCAL key or send LOCAL 716 over the bus Delay Measurement Options 3 9 A programmable delay is available after event detection It can be set manually or an auto delay can be used With auto delay the Model 2010 selects a delay based on the function and range The AUTO settings are listed in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Auto delay settings Function DCV ACV FREQ DCI ACI Q2W Q4W dryckt w amp w o ocomp Conti
143. ds through the trigger model down to the device action In general the device action includes a measurement and when scanning closes the next channel Control Source As shown in Figure 4 11 a control source is used to hold up operation until the programmed event occurs The control source options are as follows e IMMediate Event detection is immediately satisfied allowing operation to continue e MANual Event detection is satisfied by pressing the TRIG key The Model 2010 Multimeter must be in LOCAL mode for it to respond to the TRIG key Press the LOCAL key or send LOCAL 16 over the bus to remove the instrument from the remote mode TIMer Event detection is immediately satisfied on the initial pass through the loop Each subsequent detection is satisfied when the programmed timer interval 0 to 999999 999 seconds elapses The timer source is only available during step scan operation The timer resets to its initial state when the instrument goes into the normal mode of operation or into the idle state e EXTernal Event detection is satisfied when an input trigger via the TRIGGER LINK connector is received by the Model 2010 Multimeter e BUS Event detection is satisfied when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received by the Model 2010 Multimeter Delay A programmable delay is available after the event detection The delay can be manually set from 0 to 999999 999 seconds or Auto Delay can be used With Auto Delay
144. e SENSe 1 CURRent AC REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for Q4 SENSe 1 PERiod REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for PER SENSe 1 FREQuency REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for FREQ SENSe 1 TEMPerature REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for TEMP SENSe 1 VOLT DC STERminals REFerence ACQuire Acquire reference for sense terminals Description When one of these commands is sent the measured input signal is acquired and established as the reference value This command is typically used to zero the display For example if the instrument is displaying a 1uV offset sending this command and enabling Reference see STATe zeroes the display This command is functional only if the instrument is on the specified measurement function Sending this command while in any other function causes an error Also if the latest reading is overflowed OFLO or a reading has not been triggered an error occurs when this command is sent The ACQuire command is coupled to the REFerence lt n gt command See the description for REFerence for details SCPI Command Reference 5 45
145. e REFerence lt n gt command the REFerence query command returns the programmed value Conversely when a reference is set using the ACQuire command the REFerence query command returns the acquired reference value 5 44 SCPI Command Reference STATe lt b gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for Q4 SENSe 1 FREQuency REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for FREQ SENSe 1 PERiod REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for PER SENSe 1 TEMPerature REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for TEMP SENSe 1 VOLT DC STERminals REFerence STATe lt b gt Control reference for sense terminals Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable reference 0 or OFF Disable reference Query STATe Query state of reference Description These commands are used to enable or disable Reference for the specified function When enabled the displayed reading will include the programmed reference value see REFerence lt n gt and ACQuire When disabled the displayed reading will not include the reference value ACQuir
146. e TRG command is pending To do this send the ABORt command to place the instrument in idle which by definition completes the initiate command Since continuous initiation is on operation continues on into the Trigger Model After sending the TRG command an ASCII 1 is placed in the Output Queue and the MAV bit sets when the TRG command is finished After OPC is executed additional commands cannot be sent to the Model 2010 until the pending overlapped commands are finished For example INITiate CONTinuous ON followed by OPC locks up the instrument and requires a device clear DCL or SDC before it will accept any more commands NOTE See OPC TRG and WAI for more information Remote Operation 4 4 Program Fragment PRINT 1 output 16 syst pres Select defaults PRINT 1 output 16 init cont off abort Place 2010 in idle PRINT 1 output 16 trig coun 1 sour tim PRINT 1 output 16 samp coun 5 Program for five measurements and stop idle PRINT 1 output 16 init opc Start measurements and send kopc PRINT 1 enter 16 Get response when 2010 goes into idle LINE INPUT 2 aS Read contents of Output Queue PRINT a Display the ASCII 1 OPT Option Identification Query Determine if an option is installed Description The response message indicates the presence or absence of an optional scanner card For example 0 No scanner card installed 200X SCAN Scann
147. e accuracies the absolute uncertainties of the calibration sources must be added to the relative accuracies The absolute uncertainties for the calibration sources used during Keithley s factory calibration are included in the specifications The uncertainties of the operator s sources may be different All AC specifications are given as absolute accuracies Typical accuracies Accuracy can be specified as typical or warranted All specifications shown are warranted unless specifically noted Almost 99 of the 2010 s specifications are warranted specifica tions In some cases it is not possible to obtain sources to maintain traceability on the perfor mance of every unit in production on some measurements e g high voltage high frequency signal sources with sufficient accuracy do not exist These values are listed as typical 2010 Low Noise Multimeter DC CHARACTERISTICS CONDITIONS MED 1 PLC or SLOW 5 PLC ACCURACY ppm of reading ppm of range CURRENT 5 RESISTANCE ppm parts per million e g 10ppm 0 001 TEMPERATURE OR BURDEN OR CLAMP 24 Hour 3 90 Day 1Year 2 Years COEFFICIENT FUNCTION RANGE RESOLUTION VOLTAGE VOLTAGE 23 C 1 23 C 5 23 C 5 23 C 5 0 18 C amp 28 50 C Voltage 100 00000 mV 10 nV gt 10 GQ 10 9 25 9 37 9 50 10 2 6 1 0000000 V 100 nV gt 10 GQ 7 2 18 2 25 2 32 2 24 l 10 000000 V 1 pV gt 10 GQ 7 4 18 4 24 4 32 4 2 1 100 00000 V 10 pV 10 MQ 1 10 4
148. e and speed is acceptable e SLOW sets integration time to 5PLC SLOW provides better noise performance at the expense of speed NOTE The integration time can be set for any measurement function except frequency SLOW period SLOW continuity FAST and diode test MEDium For frequency and period this value is gate time or aperture For the AC functions MEDium and SLOW have no effect on the number of power line cycles Measurement Options 3 7 Bandwidth The rate setting for AC voltage and current measurements determines the bandwidth setting e Slow 3Hz to 300kHz e Medium 30Hz to 300kHz e Fast 300Hz to 300kHz Bandwidth is used to specify the lowest frequency of interest When the Slow bandwidth 3Hz to 300kHz is chosen the signal goes through an analog RMS converter The output of the RMS converter goes to a fast 1kHz sampling A D and the RMS value is calculated from 1200 digitized samples 1 2s When the Medium bandwidth 30Hz to 300kHz is chosen the same circuit is used However only 120 samples 120ms are needed for an accurate calculation because the analog RMS converter has turned most of the signal to DC In the Fast bandwidth 300Hz to 300kHz the output of the analog RMS converter nearly pure DC at these frequencies is simply measured at 1 PLC 16 6ms 60Hz line frequency Table 3 1 lists the rate settings for the various measurement functions The FAST MED and SLOW annunciators are o
149. e buffer Bit B8 Buffer Half Full BHF Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is half full Bit B9 Buffer Full BFL Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is full Bits B10 through B15 Not used B15 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF ees 512 256 128 __ 32 16 8 4 2 1 29 28 27 25 24 23 22 21 29 0 1 0 1 0 1 oA 0 1 O 1 0 1 O 1 O 1 Value 1 Measurement Event Set Events BFL Buffer Full 0 Measurement Event Cleared BHF Buffer Half Full BAV Buffer Available RAV Reading Available HL High Limit LL Low Limit ROF Reading Overflow 5 56 SCPI Command Reference Questionable Event Register Bits BO through B3 Not used Bit B4 Temperature Summary Temp Set bit indicates that an invalid reference junction measurement has occurred for thermocouple temperature measurements Bits B5 through B7 Not used Bit B8 Calibration Summary Cal Set bit indicates that an invalid calibration constant was detected during the power up sequence The instrument will instead use a default calibration constant This error will clear after successful calibration of the instrument Bits B9 through B13 Not used Bit B14 Command Warning Warn Set bit indicates th
150. e cable is properly connected to the controller Most controllers are equipped with an IEEE 488 style connector but a few may require a different type of connecting cable See your controllers instruction manual for information about properly connecting to the IEEE 488 bus 4 10 Remote Operation NOTE You canonly have 15 devices connected to an IEEE 488 bus including the controller The maximum cable length is either 20 meters or two meters times the number of devices whichever is less Not observing these limits may cause erratic bus operation Selecting the primary address The Model 2010 Multimeter ships from the factory with a GPIB address of 16 When the multimeter powers up it momentarily displays the primary address You can set the address to a value of 0 30 Do not assign the same address to another device or to a controller that is on the same GPIB bus Usually controller addresses are 0 or 21 but see the controllers instruction manual for details Make sure the address of the controller is the same as that specified in the controllers programming language To change the primary address follow these steps 1 Access the GPIB configuration settings by pressing SHIFT then GPIB You see GPIB ON with GPIB blinking 2 Go to Address choice by pressing the W key You see ADDR 16 ie Go to the numeric field by pressing the key Enter a new address from 0 30 by using the A and W press ENTER 5 Return to the main disp
151. e counter over the bus These additional blocks are shown in the trigger models of Figure 3 12 and Figure 3 13 Uses of the timer control source reading counter and channel counter are shown in the scanning examples later in this section Figure 3 12 C idle gt lt Front panel triggering with stepping More Ye A lt 7 Readings Reading 2 Count AA Trigger Counter Control Event Source Detection Immediate External y Timer Output Delay Trigger gt Device Action Figure 3 13 Front panel triggering with scanning Measurement Options 3 23 More i Yes Reading Readings Count y Trigger Counter Control Event Source Detection Output Immediate Trigger External Timer P Yes A Scan List anrs 3 Length Y Sample Counter Delay gt ee ction Using SHIFT COMFIG to configure stepping and scanning Using the SHIFT CONFIG key combination you can select internal or external scanning the minimum and maximum channels in the scan list the time between scans and the reading count To configure stepping or scanning perform the following 1 Select the desired measurement function Press the SHIFT CONFIG keys to access the step scan configuration Select the type of scan INTernal or EXTernal by using the A and keys and pressing ENTER Select the first
152. e of the REM line as the instrument must be addressed to listen with REM true before the REM indicator turns on When the instrument is in remote all front panel keys except for the LOCAL key are locked out When REM is turned off the instrument is in the local state and front panel operation is restored TALK This indicator is on when the instrument is in the talker active state Place the unit in the talk state by addressing it to talk with the correct MTA My Talk Address command TALK is off when the unit is in the talker idle state Place the unit in the talker idle state by sending an UNT Untalk command addressing it to listen or sending the IFC Interface Clear command LSTN This indicator is on when the Model 2010 Multimeter is in the listener active state which is activated by addressing the instrument to listen with the correct MLA My Listen Address command LSTN is off when the unit is in the listener idle state Place the unit in the listener idle state by sending UNL Unlisten addressing it to talk or sending the IFC Interface Clear command over the bus SRQ You can program the instrument to generate a service request SRQ when one or more errors or conditions occur When this indicator is on a service request has been generated This indicator stays on until the serial poll byte is read or all the conditions that caused SRQ have ceased to exist LOCAL key The LOCAL key cancels the remote state and restor
153. e or disable autozero ON STATe Query autozero KEY lt NRf gt Simulate key press 1 to 31 see Figure 5 10 V KEY Query the last pressed key y CLEar Clears messages from the Error Queue BEEPer Path to control beeper STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper ON y STATe Query state of beeper y LOCal Take 2010 out of remote and restore operation of front panel controls RS 232 only REMote Place 2010 in remote RS 232 only RWLock Lockout front panel controls RS 232 only KCLick lt b gt Turn the keyclick on off ON KCLick Query the keyclick status LFRequency Query power line frequency Note Clearing the Error Queue Power up and CLS Clears the Error Queue RST SYSTem PRESet and STATus PRESet No effect Table 5 9 TRACe command summary Command Description Peau x SCPI parameter TRACe DATA Use TRACe or DATA as root command CLEar Clear readings from buffer FREE Query bytes available and bytes in use V POINts lt NRf gt Specify size of buffer 2 to 1024 y POINts Query buffer size y FEED lt name gt Select source of readings SENSe 1 CALCulate 1 NONE y CONTrol lt name gt Select buffer control mode NEVer or NEXT y CONTrol Query buffer control mode V FEED Query source of readings for buffer V DATA Read all readings in the buffer y SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on the commands in this subsystem SCPI Comma
154. e stack is then cleared and the process starts over Choose this filter for scanning so readings from other channels are not averaged with the present channel Response time The filter parameters have speed and accuracy tradeoffs for the time needed to display store or output a filtered reading These affect the number of reading conversions for speed versus accuracy and response to input signal changes Figure 3 1 i Conversion 11 Conversi 12 Moving average and Convenio 10 ae en er repeating filter 9 10 epeating filters H A r Reading z 7 Reading 8 Reading e 1 6 2 7 3 e e 5 6 4 5 3 4 Conversion Conversion 2 Conversion 3 A Type Moving Average Readings 10 Conversion 10 Conversion 20 Conversion 30 9 19 29 8 18 28 7 17 27 H 6 Reading 16 Reading s 26 _ Reading 5 1 15 2 25 3 e 4 14 e 24 3 13 23 2 12 22 Conversion 1 Conversion 11 Conversion 21 B Type Repeating Readings 10 Measurement Options 3 5 Relative The rel relative function can be used to null offsets or subtract a baseline reading from present and future readings When rel is enabled the instrument uses the present reading as a relative value Subsequent readings will be the difference between the actual input value and the rel value You can define a rel value for each function Once a rel value is established for a meas
155. eading NOTE To repeat buffer storage send the following command and then repeat the steps following the Start everything comment in the above example CALL SEND 16 feed cont next status C 8 Example Programs Taking readings with the scanner card The Model 2000 SCAN is an optional 10 channel scanner card for the Model 2010 Multimeter Only one channel can be closed at a time If you close a channel while another is already closed the first one opens with break before make operation You can use the scanner card two ways One way is to issue a command to close a particular channel before sending other commands to take readings The other way is to program the scan list and let the meter take care of closing a channel before taking a reading The following example program measures DC volts on channel 1 AC volts on channel 2 and 2 wire resistance on channel 3 using the ROUTe CLOSe command Example Programs Example program to demonstrate taking readings on different scanner channels For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls in INIT ARM LAY1 ARM LAY2 and TRIG subsystems and put trigger model in IDLE state set function to DCV CALL SEND 16 rst status Close channel 1 take DC voltage reading
156. eading After sending this command and addressing the Model 2010 to talk the reading is sent to the computer This command does not affect the instrument setup This command does not trigger a measurement The command simply requests the last available reading Note that this command can repeatedly return the same reading Until there is a new reading this command continues to return the old reading If your application requires a fresh reading use the DATA FRESh command see the SENSe Subsystem command This command is automatically asserted when the READ or MEASure command is sent 5 4 SCPI Command Reference READ command sREAD 2 Description This command is typically used with the instrument in the one shot measurement mode to trigger and acquire a specified number of readings The SAMPle COUNt command is used to specify the number of readings see Trigger Subsystem Note that the readings are stored in the buffer When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order they are presented ABORt INITiate FETCh When ABORt is executed the instrument goes into the idle state if continuous initiation is disabled If continuous initiation is enabled the operation re starts at the beginning of the Trigger Model If the instrument is in the idle state INITiate takes the instrument out of the idle state If continuous initiation is enabled INITiate CONTinuous ON then the INI
157. eadlock EE 214 Trigger deadlock EE 213 Init ignored EE 212 Arm ignored EE 211 Trigger ignored EE 210 Trigger error EE 202 Settings lost due to rtl EE 201 Invalid while in local EE 200 Execution error EE 178 Expression data not allowed EE 171 Invalid expression EE 170 Expression error EE 168 Block data not allowed EE 161 Invalid block data EE 160 Block data error EE 158 String data not allowed EE 154 String too long EE 151 Invalid string data EE 150 String data error EE Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Status and Error Messages Number Description Event 148 Character data not allowed EE 144 Character data too long EE 141 Invalid character data EE 140 Character data error EE 128 Numeric data not allowed EE 124 Too many digits EE 123 Exponent too large EE 121 Invalid character in number EE 120 Numeric data error EE 114 Header suffix out of range EE 113 Undefined header EE 112 Program mnemonic too long EE 111 Header separator error EE 110 Command header error EE 109 Missing parameter EE 108 Parameter not allowed EE 105 GET not allowed EE 104 Data type error EE 103 Invalid separator EE 102 Syntax error EE 101 Invalid character EE 100 Command error EE 000 No error SE 101 Operation complete SE 121 Device calibrating SE 122 Device settling SE 123 Device ranging SE 124 Device sweeping SE 125 Device measuring SE 126 Device calculating SE 161 Progra
158. eeeeeaeeneeeatees 4 18 Measurement event Status oo eee eeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeaeees 4 19 Questionable event Status cccccesseeessseesssneeeseteeeesneeeesees 4 19 Status byte and service request SRQ oc ceeseeseeeeneeeseeeeees 4 21 Trigger model remote Operation 0 00 eee eseeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 4 24 Device action trigger model eel ee eeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeneees 4 26 Standard event enable register cee eeceeseeeeneeeneeeseeeseeeeees 4 36 Standard event status register 0 eee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 37 Service request enable register eee eeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 Status byte Tegistet sii c csestescksesedeesssassssnceseesnsadsseanscesuerssesets 4 45 SCPI Command Reference ASCII data format sessies lese isuri eresse e ere ra ENTEN oesi 5 28 IEEE754 single precision data format 32 data bits 5 29 TEEE754 double precision data format 64 data bits 5 29 Measurement event register 0 eee eee eseeeeeeeereeeaeeseeeatees 5 55 Questionable event register 0 0 eee eseeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeatees 5 56 Operation event register oo lees eeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeatens 5 57 Measurement event enable register s es 5 59 Questionable event enable register 0 ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 59 Operation event enable register eee eseeeeeereeseeeneees 5 59 INGY PICSSiCOdES errs a ER ETE 5 69 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEE 488 bus configuration 2 0 eeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeneeaes E 3 TEEE 488 h
159. eeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeseesnees 2 15 Warm up TIME ooo eee eesteeeseceseceseeeeeetaeceseeseaeeeaeessaeeeaeeneas 2 15 Display encsi e E venta estes rete chaste eas 2 16 Status and error messages eeeeeseeseceeteeeeeeeeaeeeseeceeeeeees 2 16 Measuring voltage casi oniar e iii teins 2 16 COMMECHONS 25 cissscssseveussessssesvesetctsesdscoondesvsnvatesesnsestonnsvesvasse 2 16 Crest factor serenite erir ea as a lesvsivaentomtocieseeveees 2 17 Low level considerations esssssesseseseeseseereseeresresesresrreeses 2 17 Rath AEE E N 2 20 COMMECHIONS seseris esasnsesssupssssndstenscessenteavencoseseorseiostivessenee 2 20 Measuring voltage with the SENSE terminals 0 2 21 Using ratio with the relative function 00 0 eee eeeeeseeeeees 2 21 Measuring Current cccschen cecsiceahs coat ccdanssadesabeuscteusaueuecegusteedneeees 2 22 COMMCCHONS ssiri irae iE r RE EE E NEEE 2 22 AMPS fuse replacement sssesssesesesseseesrsseseserrereresrsseresrrssee 2 23 Measuring resistance susitieeiesrereirsisiesseiesssreiri orior o ieni anirai 2 24 Connections ssion teienei kocia india e NEEN 2 24 MOL AIM Goss sss sceasesan cba sasevecs ecgeneans ne ea E E EKR 2 25 Low resistance measurements es eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 25 Measuring frequency and period 00 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 Wreger level woi ssccsecisceeteisvess tenesciipeeed doen eueea tate letenduances 2 28 Gate TING e3 focasecseaieciacheseesteasv
160. eference impedance level When dBm units is selected ACV dBm measurements are made using the specified dBm reference impedance The reference impedance is specified in ohms and is not range dependent For example a dBm reference level of 600 is 600 on all ACV measurement ranges A rational number is rounded to the nearest valid integer value 5 78 SCPI Command Reference DC lt name gt UNIT VOLTage DC lt name gt Specify DCV units Parameters lt name gt V DC voltage measurement units DB dB DC voltage measurement units DBM dBm DC voltage measurement units Query DC Query DC voltage units Description This command is used to select the units for DCV measurements With volt V units selected normal DC voltage measurements are made for the DCV function With DB units selected DC dB voltage measurements are performed The DBM units selection is used to make decibel measurements referenced to lmW dB and dBm measurements are explained further in Section 2 DB REFerence lt n gt UNIT VOLTage DC DB REFerence lt n gt Specify dBm reference Parameter lt n gt le 7V to 1000V Specify reference in volts or lt n gt 100nV to 1000V Query REFerence Description This command is used to specify the dB reference level When DB units is selected VOLTage DC DB DCV dB measurements are made using the specified dB reference level The reference level is specified in volts and is not range dependent For example
161. el polling capabilities PPO DC Device Clear Function DC1 defines the ability of the instrument to be cleared initialized DT Device Trigger Function DTI defines the ability of the Model 2010 to have readings triggered C Controller Function The instrument does not have controller capabilities C0 TE Extended Talker Function The instrument does not have extended talker capabilities TEO LE Extended Listener Function The instrument does not have extended listener capabilities LEO E Bus Driver Type The instrument has open collector bus drivers E1 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information F 2 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Introduction The IEEE 488 2 standard requires specific information about how the Model 2010 implements the standard Paragraph 4 9 of the IEEE 488 2 standard Std 488 2 1987 lists the documentation requirements Table F 1 provides a summary of the requirements and provides the information or references the manual for that information Table F 2 lists the coupled commands used by the Model 2010 The Model 2010 complies with SCPI version 1991 0 Table 5 2 through Table 5 11 list the SCPI confirmed commands and the non SCPI commands implemented by the Model 2010 Table F 1 IEEE 488 documentation requirements Requirements Description or reference ad 2 3 4 5 a b c d e 6 7 8 9 10
162. en PRINT Set COM2 baud rate to 9600 PRINT Set no flow control and CR as Terminator Configure serial port parameters ComOpen COM2 9600 N 8 1 ASC CDO CS0 DSO LF OPO RS TB8192 RB8192 OPEN ComOpen FOR RANDOM AS 1 Model 2010 setup commands Note Serial communications only operate with SCPI mode PRINT 1 RST Clear registers PRINT 1 CLS Clear Model 2010 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 PRINT 1 SLEEP 1 PRINT 1 INIT CONT SENS FUNC SYST AZER SENS VOLT ENS VOLT SENS VOLT ENS VOLT FORM ELEM TRIG COUN SAMP COUN TR TR IG DEL 0 TRIG SOUR DISP ENAB READ LINE INPUT 1 RD PRINT RD PRINT 1 DISP ENAB Clean up and quit finish CLOSE 1 CLEAR END OFF ABORT VOLT DC STAT OFF DC AVER STAT OFF DC NPLC 0 01 DC RANG 10 DC DIG 4 READ 1 n 100 IMM OFF oN Example Programs Init off DCV Auto zero off Filter off NPLC 0 01 10V range 4 digit Reading only Trig count 1 Sample count 100 No trigger delay Immediate trigger No display Wait one second Read query Get data Display data Turn on display Close file Interface clear C 14 Example Programs Models 196 199 Commands
163. enabled the instrument automatically selects a delay based on the selected function and range See the Auto Delay table in Section 3 for delay times Auto Delay is typically used for scanning The nominal delay will be just long enough to allow each relay to settle before making the measurement 4 26 Remote Operation Device Action Figure 4 12 provides a detailed illustration of the device action If the repeat filter is enabled then the instrument samples the specified number of reading conversions to yield a single filtered reading If the moving filter is active or filter is disabled then only one reading conversion is performed Figure 4 12 From Delay block of To Output Triggerblock of Device action Trigger Model See Figure 4 11 Trigger Model See Figure 4 11 trigger model iy Device Action gt Conv Conv Conv Hold Chan Filtering Process Filter enabled Conv Reading conversion Hold Hold Feature process if enabled Chan Close channel if scanning If the hold feature is enabled see the HOLD commands in Section 5 then the first processed reading becomes the seed reading and operation loops back to the beginning of the device action After the next reading is processed it is compared to the programmed hold window 0 01 to 20 If the reading is within the window then operation again loops back to the beginning of the device a
164. ent serial polls to monitor bit B6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event can cause another SRQ even if the event register that caused the first SRQ has not been cleared A serial poll clears RQS but does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all Status Byte event summary bits are cleared The following QuickBASIC 4 5 program using the KPC 488 2 interface and the CECHP driver demonstrates how serial poll can be used to detect an SRQ CLS OPEN ieee FOR OUTPUT AS 1 OPEN ieee FOR INPUT AS 2 PRINT 1 output 16 cls Clear Status Byte Register PRINT 1 output 16 ese 32 Unmask command errors PRINT 1 output 16 sre 32 Unmask event summary message PRINT 1 output 16 ese Error missing parameter SLEEP 1 PRINT 1 SPOLL 02 Serial poll 2010 INPUT 2 S Read Status Byte Register S S OR 191 OR register with a mask IF S 255 THEN GOSUB srq Go to subroutine to acknowledge SRO END IF PRINT END srq PRINT SRQ Has Occurred RQS bit B6 is set 1 RETURN 4 24 Remote Operation Trigger model GPIB operation The following paragraphs describe how the Model 2010 Multimeter operates over the GPIB bus The flowchart in Figure 4 11 summarizes operation over the bus The flowchart is called the trigger model because operation is controlled by SCPI commands from the Trigger subsystem see Section 5 for more information Key SCP
165. er double quotes can instead be used For example func volt func volt Each measurement function remembers its own unique setup configuration such as range speed resolution filter and rel This eliminates the need to re program setup conditions each time you switch from one function to another 5 38 SCPI Command Reference DATA command DATA SENSe 1 DATA2 Description FRESh Return reading This query command is used to read the latest instrument reading This command returns the raw reading or a reading that is the result of the Reference REL from the front panel operation For example if a reference value of 1 0 is established the reading returned by this command is the raw reading minus 1 0 Calculated MATH readings cannot be read with this command see the CALCulate subsystem for information on how to read math calculations The reading is returned in exponent form For example a 10V DC reading will be displayed on the CRT as 1 000000E 01 The measurement function is not included in the response message Thus you may want to perform a function query see previous command after a reading query SENSe 1 DATA FRESh Return new reading Description This query command is used to return a new fresh reading This command will not request the same reading twice If a new reading is triggered this command will wait until the reading is available rather than request t
166. er card installed RCL Recall Return to setup stored in memory Parameters lt NRf gt 0 Description Use this command to return the Model 2010 to the configuration stored in memory The SAV command is used to store the setup configuration in memory location Only one setup configuration can be saved and recalled The Model 2010 ships from the factory with SYSTen PRESet defaults loaded into the available setup memory If a recall error occurs the setup memory defaults to the SYSTem PRESet values 4 42 Remote Operation RST RESET Return 2010 to RST defaults Description When the RST command is sent the Model 2010 performs the following operations 1 Returns the Model 2010 to the RST default conditions see SCPI tables 2 Cancels all pending commands 3 Cancels response to any previously received OPC and OPC commands SAV Save Save present setup in memory Parameters lt NRf gt 0 Description Use the SAVE command to save the present instrument setup configuration in memory for later recall Any control affected by RST can be saved by the SAV command The RCL command is used to restore the instrument to the saved setup configuration Only one setup configuration can be saved and recalled SRE lt NRf gt Service Request Enable Program service request enable register SRE Service Request Enable Query Read service request enable register Parameters lt NRf 0 Clears enable regis
167. er model 3 8 Trigger model GPIB operation 4 24 Trigger model operation 4 25 Trigger operations 3 8 Trigger subsystem 5 73 Typical command sequences E 11 naddress commands E 8 niline commands E 7 niversal multiline commands E 7 SER RTD Type 2 32 sing an internal scanner card 3 20 sing common commands and SCPI commands in the same message 4 32 sing external scanner cards 3 20 sing OPEN and CLOSE keys 3 21 sing ratio with the relative function 2 21 sing SHIFT CONFIG to configure stepping and scanning 3 23 sing the lt and gt keys 3 21 Ge ee exe coi coe ela cs Voltmeter complete 3 12 Warm up time 2 15 Warranty information 1 3 Service Form Model No Serial No Date Name and Telephone No Company List all control settings describe problem and check boxes that apply to problem Q Intermittent Q Analog output follows display Q Particular range or function bad specify IEEE failure U Obvious problem on power up U Batteries and fuses are OK U Front panel operational U All ranges or functions are bad UQ Checked all cables Display or output check one Drifts U Unable to zero Unstable Overload Q Will not read applied input Calibration only U Certificate of calibration required Data required attach any additional sheets as necessary Show a block diagram of your measurement including all instruments connected whether power is turned on or not Also desc
168. es local operation of the instrument Pressing the LOCAL key also turns off the REM indicator and returns the display to normal if a user defined message was displayed If the LLO Local Lockout command is in effect the LOCAL key is also inoperative 4 16 Remote Operation Status structure See Figure 4 5 for the Model 2010 Multimeter s status structure Instrument events such as errors are monitored and manipulated by four status register sets Notice that these status register sets feed directly into the Status Byte Register More detailed illustrations of these register sets are provided in Figure 4 5 through Figure 4 9 Figure 4 5 Questionable Questionable Questionable Event Condition Event Enable Model 2010 status ae gees Ree register structure 0 0 S o y 1 1 1 y 2 2 2 y 3 3 3 y Temperature Summary Temp Temp O Temp 3 5 5 5 ey 6 6 6 y 7 7 7 L
169. f the instrument is addressed to talk it places its data string on the bus one byte at a time The controller reads the information and the appropriate software can be used to direct the information to the desired location The signal lines on the IEEE 488 bus are grouped into three different categories data lines management lines and handshake lines The data lines handle bus data and commands while the management and handshake lines ensure that proper data transfer and operation takes place Each bus line is active low with approximately zero volts representing a logic 1 true The following paragraphs describe the operation of these lines Data lines The IEEE 488 bus uses eight data lines that transfer data one byte at a time DIO1 Data Input Output through DIO8 Data Input Output are the eight data lines used to transmit both data and multiline commands and are bi directional The data lines operate with low true logic Bus management lines The five bus management lines help to ensure proper interface control and management These lines are used to send the uniline commands ATN Attention The ATN state determines how information on the data bus is to be interpreted IFC Interface Clear The IFC line controls clearing of instruments from the bus REN Remote Enable The REN line is used to place the instrument on the bus in the remote mode EOI End or Identify The EOI line is used to mark the end of a mul
170. fer If these conditions are not met the source must wait until NDAC and NRFD have the correct status If the source is a controller NRFD and NDAC must be stable for at least 100ns after ATN is set true Because of the possibility of a bus hang up many controllers have time out routines that display messages in case the transfer sequence stops for any reason Once all NDAC and NRFD are properly set the source sets DAV low indicating to accepting devices that the byte on the data lines is now valid NRFD will then go low and NDAC will go high once all devices have accepted the data Each device will release NDAC at its own rate but NDAC will not be released to go high until all devices have accepted the data byte The previous sequence is used to transfer both data talk and listen addresses as well as multiline commands The state of the ATN line determines whether the data bus contains data addresses or commands as described in the following paragraphs IEEE 488 handshake DATA X SOURCE sequence DAV SOURCE VALID a ALLREADY ACCEPTOR NRFD ua ALL ACCEPTED NDAC ACCEPTOR E 6 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Bus commands The instrument may be given a number of special bus commands through the IEEE 488 interface The following paragraphs briefly describe the purpose of the bus commands which are grouped into the following three categories 1 Uniline commands Sent by setting the associated bus lines true For example
171. figuration option by pressing the ENTER key twice You see LANG lt name gt Move to the language selection field by pressing the key Select the programming language you want by pressing the V or A key until you see the appropriate language The menu scrolls through SCPI and 199 6 Keithley Models 196 199 Confirm your selection by pressing ENTER The multimeter returns to the measurement mode Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI is fully supported by the GPIB and RS 232 interfaces Always calibrate the Model 2010 Multimeter using the SCPI language Keithley Models 196 199 Digital Multimeter The Model 2010 Multimeter implements virtually all commands available in the Keithley Models 196 199 Digital Multimeter except for the self test and calibration commands The commands are listed in Appendix D See the Models 196 199 Digital Multimeter User s Manuals for more information about remote programming Remote Operation 4 5 RS 232 operation Sending and receiving data The RS 232 interface transfers data using eight data bits one stop bit and no parity Make sure the controller you connect to the multimeter also uses these settings You can break data transmissions by sending a C or X character string to the multimeter This clears any pending operation and discards any pending output Selecting baud rate The baud rate is the rate at which the Model 2010 Multimeter and the programming terminal c
172. fined as follows Vu Vemr tIsrss Offset compensation is available up to 100MQ However compensation is only being used on the 10KQ and lower ranges An o will flash on the display if offset compensation is turned on and measuring 100KQ and higher ranges indicating offset compensation has no effect Since the thermal EMF voltage is measured during the first and second half of the cycle it can be subtracted from the voltage measurement made during the first half of the cycle The result is the offset compensated voltage measurement Vmi Vm2 Vy Vemr IsrsRs Veme IspRs Vm Rs lsrs Isr Therefore VM Isfs Isp Figure 2 7 Offset compensated ohms measurement I I I I I I Source l Current I Thermal offset measurement Voltage measurement with source current off VEMF Isr Rs Voltage measurement with source current on VEMF Isrs R S Basic Measurements 2 27 2 28 Basic Measurements Measuring frequency and period The Model 2010 can make frequency measurements from 3Hz to 500kHz on voltage ranges of 100mV 1V 10V 100V and 750V Period measurements can be taken from 2us to 333ms on the same voltage ranges as the frequency The instrument uses the volts input terminals to measure frequency The AC voltage range can be changed with the RANGE A and keys The signal voltage must be greater than 10 of the full scale range CAUTION The voltage limit is subjec
173. from SHIFT SETUP External scanning channels 1 10 no timer 10 readings accessed from SHIFT CONFIG External triggers accessed from EXT TRIG Model 7001 or 7002 Factory defaults restored Scan list 1 1 1 10 Number of scans 1 Channel spacing TrigLink 3 14 Measurement Options To run the test and store readings in the Model 2010 with the unit set for external triggers press STEP or SCAN The Model 2010 waits with the asterisk annunciator lit for an external trigger from the Model 7001 7002 Press STEP on the Model 7001 7002 to take it out of idle and start the scan The scanner s output pulse triggers the Model 2010 to take a reading store it and send a trigger pulse The following explanation on operation is referenced to the operation model shown in Figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 7001 or 7002 Operation model for Press STEP to start scan 2010 itggering example 3 de gt C D gt gt cK Bypass NZ Wait for Trigger Link K Wait for Trigger gt Trigger Link Trigger gt Scan Make Channel Measurement Output Trigger Trigger Output Trigger Trigger Scanned Channels 2 Pressing EXT TRIG then STEP or SCAN on the multimeter places it at point A in the flowchart where it is waiting for an external trigger Pressing STEP takes the Model 7001 7002 out of the idle state an
174. ger controls causes the instrument to arm itself for triggers The SCPI trigger model implemented in the Model 2010 gives e Explicit control over the trigger source the TRIGger subsystem e A way for completely disabling triggers Changing any of the settings in the TRIGger subsystem does not automatically arm the Model 2010 for triggers The following program sets up the Model 2010 to take one reading each time it receives an external trigger pulse Example program to demonstrate one shot external triggering For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21 CALL initialize 21 0 Reset controls and put trigger model in IDLE state CALL SEND 16 rst status CALL SEND 16 trig sour ext coun inf status start everything CALL SEND 16 init status After the Model 2010 receives the INITiate command it stops at the control source in the trig ger model waiting for a trigger pulse Each time a pulse arrives at the Trigger Link connector the Model 2010 takes one reading Because TRIGger COUNt has been set to INFinity the instrument never enters the idle state You can send the ABORt command to put the instrument in the idle state disabling triggers until another INITiate command is sent Example Programs C 5 Generating SRQ on buffer full Whe
175. git resolution let lt n gt 3 5 for 4 digit let lt n gt 4 5 and so on Internally the instrument rounds the entered parameter value to the nearest integer SCPI Command Reference 5 47 AVERage commands The AVERage commands are used to configure and control the filter The Filter is explained in Section 3 STATe lt b gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC AVERage STATe lt b gt Control filter for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC AVERage STATe lt b gt Control filter for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC AVERage STATe lt b gt Control filter for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC AVERage STATe lt b gt Control filter for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance AVERage STATe lt b gt Control filter for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance AVERage STATe lt b gt Control filter for Q4 SENSe 1 TEMPerature AVERage STATe lt b gt Control filter for TEMP Parameters lt b gt OorOFF Disable the digital filter lorON Enable the digital filter Query STATe Query state of digital filter Description These commands are used to enable or disable the digital averaging filter for the specified function When enabled readings will be filtered according to how the filter is configured TCONtrol lt name gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage D
176. gure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 4 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Basic Measurements Model 2010 front panel scssssssussesisiissinsiiiiisiiieii 2 3 Model 2010 rear panel ceeeceeccceseeeeceneeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 2 6 Power mod le i5 6 csesceSeciceesshdesssserascascadbeoactuenstceapeapissezenienetsies 2 8 DC and AC voltage measurement ssseseeeesesreeeerrerrererrsreee 2 17 DC and AC current measurements ssseseeeeeeereeeerrererrerrereee 2 22 Two and four wire resistance measurements n se 2 25 Offset compensated ohms measurement ss ssesesseereereeeeee 2 27 Frequency and period measurements ssseseeeeeessrerreeereeeee 2 29 Thermocouple and RTD temperature measurements 2 31 Continuity measurements eee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 36 DIGGS TESTING esse ersescecicek ss scsteivecacecgusivenvezesesecasseeressdedeseacdeceses 2 37 Measurement Options Moving average and repeating filters o n 3 4 Front panel triggering without stepping scanning 3 8 Rear panel pinout 0 0 eee eeceeseeeseeceseeceeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeesees 3 11 Trigger link input pulse specifications EXT TRIG 3 12 Trigger link output pulse specifications VMC 3 12 DUT test Sy Stemi sece enr hoes decebies
177. h high transient over voltages Measurement Category II connections require protection for high transient over voltages often associated with local AC mains connections Assume all measurement control and data I O connections are for connection to Category I sources unless otherwise marked or described in the Manual Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may be present on cable connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standards Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60VDC are present A good safety practice is to expect that hazardous voltage is present in any unknown circuit before measuring Operators of this product must be protected from electric shock at all times The responsible body must ensure that operators are prevented access and or insulated from every connection point In some cases connections must be exposed to potential human contact Product operators in these circumstances must be trained to protect themselves from the risk of electric shock If the circuit is capable of operating at or above 1000 volts no conductive part of the circuit may be exposed Do not connect switching cards directly to unlimited power circuits They are intended to be used with impedance limited sources NEVER connect switching cards directly to AC mains When connecting sources to switching cards install protective devices to limit fault cu
178. hat the Model 2010 has been turned off and turned back on since the last time this register has been read Bit Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Event PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC alge 128 64 32 16 8 4 1 Decimal Weighting 07 26 25 24 22 og Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Note Bits B8 through B15 are not shown since they are not used Value 1 Event Bit Set Events PON Power On 0 Event Bit Cleared URQ User Request CME Command Error EXE Execution Error DDE Device Dependent Error QYE Query Error OPC Operation Complete 4 38 Remote Operation IDN Identification Query Read the identification code Description The identification code includes the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels and is sent in the following format KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC MODEL 2010 xxxxxxx yyyyy zzzzz Where XxXxxxxx is the serial number yyyyy zzzzz is the firmware revision levels of the digital board ROM and display board ROM OPC Operation Complete Set the OPC bit in the standard event status register after all pending commands are complete Description On power up or when the CLS or RST is executed the Model 2010 goes into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS In this state no pending overlapped commands exist The Model 2010 has three overlapped commands e INITiate e
179. he Model 2010 can be used for low resistance measurements normally handled by a micro ohmmeter The following paragraphs discuss the Model 2010 s dry circuit testing and offset compensation modes 2 26 Basic Measurements Dry circuit testing Many low resistance measurements are made on contact devices such as switches and relay contacts The purpose of these tests is to determine whether oxidation has increased the resistance of the contacts If the voltage across the contacts during the test is too high the oxidation will be punctured and render the test meaningless Dry circuit testing limits the voltage across the DUT to 20mV or less NOTE This function is only available in four wire ohms Offset compensation Offset compensation is used to compensate for voltage potential such as thermal offsets across the device under test In offset compensation a full scale source current is applied to the resistance being measured during part of the measurement cycle Figure 2 7 shows the measure ment cycle During the first half of the measurement cycle the reduced source current is applied and the voltage being measured is any thermal EMFs present in the circuit plus the voltage across Rg with the reduced source current Vm Vemr sRBs During the second half of the measurement cycle the full scale source current is on and the total voltage measured includes the voltage drop across the resistor and any thermal EMFs This is de
180. he old reading SCPI Command Reference 5 39 HOLD Command The following commands are used to configure and control the Hold feature For details on Hold refer to Trigger Model Device Action in this section and Hold in Section 3 WINDow lt NRf gt SENSe 1 HOLD WINDow lt NRf gt Set Hold window Parameter lt NRf gt 0 01 to 20 Set window percent Query WINDow Query Hold window Description This command is used to set the window for Hold The window is expressed as a percent of the seed reading for the Hold process COUNt lt NRf gt SENSe 1 HOLD COUNt lt NRf gt Specify Hold count Parameter lt NRf gt 2 to 100 Specify Hold count Query COUNt Query Hold count Description This command is used to specify the count for Hold Count is the number of readings that are compared to the seed reading during the Hold process STATe lt b gt SENSe 1 HOLD STATe lt b gt Control on off Hold Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable Hold 1 or ON Enable Hold Query STATe Query state of Hold Description This command is used to enable or disable Hold See Hold in Section 3 and Trigger Model Device Action in this section for details on Hold 5 40 SCPI Command Reference Speed Commands NPLCycles lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC NPLCycles lt n gt Set NPLC for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC NPLCycles lt n gt Set NPLC for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC NPLCycles lt n gt Set NPLC for
181. his reading tracks the display resolution of the instrument An overflow reading reads as 9 9e37 with no units CHANnhel Corresponds the instrument reading to the channel number of a switching card If not scanning the channel number is 0 UNITs This element attaches the function unit to the reading and the channel unit internal or external to the channel number An internal channel refers to an internally installed switching card channel while an external channel refers to the channel for an external switch system This element is not available for the binary formats The ASCII format in Figure 5 1 shows the byte order of the data string Remember that the byte order can only be reversed for the binary formats When using this command to add an element you must include all elements that you want in the format For example if the reading is already specified and you want to add the channel you must include the READing parameter form elem chan read Data elements for the item list can be listed in any order but they are always sent in the order shown in Figure 5 1 5 32 SCPI Command Reference ROUTe subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to configure and control switching and are summarized in Table 5 5 Single channel or channel pair control Like operation from the front panel the following commands let you close a single channel or channel pair for 4 pole operation on an internal scanner card C
182. ically changes the type to USER see TYPE RZERo lt NRf gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD RZERo lt NRf gt Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 10 000 Query RZERo Specify resistance at 0 C Specify FRTD resistance at 0 C Query value of RZERo Description This command is used to check and or change the resistance at 0 C Remember that if you change the present resistance value the FRTD TYPE will change to USER SCPI Command Reference 5 53 ALPHa lt NRf gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD ALPHa lt NRf gt Specify alpha value Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 0 01 Specify FRTD alpha value Query ALPHa Query value of ALPHa Description This command is used to check and or change the alpha value Remember that if you change the present alpha value the FRTD TYPE will change to USER BETA lt NRf gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD BETA lt NRf gt Specify beta value Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 1 00 Specify FRTD beta value Query BETA Query value of BETA Description This command is used to check and or change the beta value Remember that if you change the present beta value the FRTD TYPE will change to USER DELTa lt NRf gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD DELTa lt NRf gt Specify delta value Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 5 00 Specify FRTD delta value Query DELTa Query value of DELTa Description This command is used to check and or change the delta value Remember that if you change the present delta value the FRTD TYP
183. ing according to the new test limits Note that sending the IMMediate command does not initiate a reading conversion Program PRINT 1 output 16 trig sour bus Place 2010 in one shot mode SLEEP 3 Wait three seconds PRINT 1 output 16 calc3 imm Re perform limit test DISPlay subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to control the display of the Model 2010 and are summarized in Table 5 3 ENABle lt b gt DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Control display circuitry Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable display circuitry 1 or ON Enable display circuitry Query ENABle Query state of display Description This command is used to enable and disable the front panel display circuitry When disabled the instrument operates at a higher speed While disabled the display is frozen All front panel controls except LOCAL are disabled Normal display operation can be resumed by using the ENABle command to enable the display or by putting the Model 2010 into local mode press LOCAL SCPI Command Reference 5 27 TEXT commands DATA lt a gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT DATA lt a gt Define message for display Parameter lt a gt ASCII characters for the message maximum of 12 characters The characters must be enclosed in either double quotes or single quotes Query DATA Query the defined text message Description These commands define the text message for display A message c
184. ing stored readings Displayed internal channel is closed Questionable reading invalid cal step Fast reading rate Digital filter enabled Basic Measurements 2 5 HOLD Instrument is in hold mode LSTN Instrument addressed to listen over GPIB MATH Math function mX b dB dBm enabled MED Medium reading rate REAR Reading acquired from rear inputs REL Relative reading displayed REM Instrument is in GPIB remote mode SCAN Instrument is in scan mode SHIFT Accessing shifted keys SLOW Slow reading rate SRQ Service request over GPIB STAT Displaying buffer statistics STEP Instrument is in step mode TALK Instrument addressed to talk over GPIB TIMER Timed scans in use TRIG Indicates external trigger front panel bus trigger link selected Input connections INPUT HI and LO Used for making DC volts AC volts two wire resistance measurements AMPS Used in conjunction with INPUT LO to make DC current and AC current measurements Also holds current input fuse 3A 250V fast blow 5x20mm SENSE 04 WIRE Used with INPUT HI and LO to make four wire resistance measure HI and LO ments and RATIO measurements in conjunction with INPUT HI and LO INPUTS Selects input connections on front or rear panel Handle Pull out and rotate to desired position 2 6 Basic Measurements Rear panel summary The rear panel of the Model 2010 is shown in Figure 2 2 This figure includes important abbreviated informa
185. ion 5 for details Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Error Available EAV A set bit indicates that an error or status message is present in the Error Queue The message can be read using one of the following SCPI commands SYSTem ERRor STATus QUEue See Section 5 for more information Bit 3 Questionable Summary Bit QSB A set bit indicates that a calibration error has occurred Bit 4 Message Available MAV A set bit indicates that a message is present in the Output Queue The message is sent to the computer when the Model 2010 is addressed to talk Bit 5 Event Summary Bit ESB A set bit indicates that an enabled standard event has occurred The event can be identified by reading the Standard Event Status Register using the ESE query command Bit 6 Master Summary Status MSS Request Service RQS A set bit indicates that one or more enabled Status Byte conditions have occurred Read the MSS bit by using the STB query command or perform a serial poll to detect the occurrence of a service request RQS bit set Bit 7 Operation Summary OSB A set bit indicates that an enabled operation event has occurred The event can be identified by reading the Operation Event Status Register using the STATus OPERation query command see Section 5 for details Remote Operation 4 45 Figure 4 16 Status byte register Bit Position Event Decimal Weighting Value Value 1 Event Bit Set Eve
186. is overwritten each time the storage operation is selected The data is volatile it is not saved through a power cycle The following paragraphs discuss storing and recalling buffered data Storing readings Use the following procedure to store readings nie ase Ea Set up the instrument for the desired configuration Press the STORE key Use the lt q gt A and W keys to select the number of readings desired Press ENTER The asterisk annunciator turns on to indicate a data storage operation It will turn off when the storage is finished Recalling readings Use the following steps to view stored readings and buffer statistics 1 Press RECALL The BUFFER annunciator indicates that stored readings are being displayed The arrow annunciator indicates that more data can be viewed with the lt q gt A and F keys As shown in Figure 3 10 use the cursor keys to navigate through the reading numbers reading values and statistics For any of the buffer statistics maximum minimum average standard deviation the STAT annunciator is on Use the EXIT key to return to the normal display Measurement Options 3 17 Figure 3 10 Buffer locations RDG NO 10 Reading Value RDG NO 9 Reading Value RDG NO 8 Reading Value RDG NO 7 Reading Value RDG NO 6 Reading Value RDG NO 5 Reading Value RDG NO 4 Reading Value a RDG NO 3 Reading Value RDG NO 2 Reading Value RANGE RDG NO 1 Reading Value RANGE ST
187. is used to separate commands within the program message When the path pointer detects a colon that immediately follows a semicolon it resets back to the root level The path pointer can only move down It cannot be moved up a level Executing a command at a higher level requires that you start over at the root command Using common commands and SCPI commands in the same message Both common commands and SCPI commands can be used in the same message as long as they are separated by semicolons A common command can be executed at any command level and will not affect the path pointer stat oper enab lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt Program message terminator PMT Each program message must be terminated with an LF line feed EOI end or identify or an LF EOI The bus will hang if your computer does not provide this termination The following example shows how a multiple command program message must be terminated rout open all scan 1 5 lt PMT gt Command execution rules e Commands execute in the order that they are presented in the program message An invalid command generates an error and of course is not executed Valid commands that precede an invalid command in a multiple command program message are executed Valid commands that follow an invalid command in a multiple command program message are ignored Remote Operation 4 33 Response messages A response message is the message se
188. ith autoranging If you want manual ranging use the RANGE A and keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected resistance 4 Connect test leads to the resistance as shown in Figure 2 6 CAUTION Do not apply more than 1000V peak between INPUT HI and LO or 350V peak between SENSE HI and SENSE LO or instrument damage may occur 5 Observe the display If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until an on scale reading is displayed Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 6 Take a reading from the display Basic Measurements Figure 2 6 Shielded Optional Shield Two and four wire Model 2010 Cable poss ossesc i J resistance measurements I I I l l Resistance l Under Test I Note Source current flows from the INPUT i HI to INPUT LO terminals l eat ee al Shielded Optional Shield Model 2010 Cable jeans ceeds SeSebaesesses7 eeeeeeeee A e aa aaaaaaa OS 2 0 S Ga aap Note Source current flows from the INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals Resistance Under Test Shielding 2 25 To achieve a stable reading shield resistances greater than 100kQ Place the resistance in a shielded enclosure and connect the shield to the INPUT LO terminal of the instrument electrically See Section 3 for information on the configuration options for two wire and four wire resistance measurements Low resistance measurements T
189. itions SAV lt NRf gt Save command Saves the present setup to the specified memory location SRE lt NRf gt Service request enable command Programs the Service Request Enable Register SRE Service request enable query Reads the Service Request Enable Register STB Read status byte query Reads the Status Byte Register TRG Trigger command Sends a bus trigger to the 2010 TST Self test query Performs a checksum test on ROM and returns the result WAI Wait to continue command Wait until all previous commands are executed CLS Clear Status Description Clear status registers and error queue Use the CLS command to clear reset to 0 the bits of the following registers in the Model 2010 e Standard Event Register e Operation Event Register e Error Queue e Measurement Event Register e Questionable Event Register This command also forces the instrument into the operation complete command idle state and operation complete query idle state ESE lt NRf gt Event Enable ESE Event Enable Query Parameters lt NRf gt 0 1 4 8 16 32 64 128 255 Description Clear register Set OPC BO Set QYE B2 Set DDE B3 Set EXE B4 Set CME B5 Set URQ B6 Set PON B7 Set all bits Remote Operation Program the standard event enable register Read the standard event register 4 35 Use the ESE command to program the Standard Event Enable Register This command is sent
190. lation 5 22 SCPI Command Reference ACQuire CALCulate 1 KMATh PERCent ACQuire Use input signal as target value Description This action command is used to acquire the present input signal reading and use it as the target value for the percent calculation STATe lt b gt CALCulate 1 STATe lt b gt Control CALC1 Parameters lt b gt 0 or off Disable CALC1 calculation 1 or on Enable CALC1 calculation Query STATe Query state on or off of CALC1 Description This command is used to enable or disable the CALC1 calculation When enabled each instrument reading will reflect the selected calculation see FORMat DATA CALCulate 1 DATA Read CALC1 result Description This query command is used to read the result of the CALC1 calculation If CALC1 is disabled or NONE is selected the raw reading will be read CALCulate2 These commands are used to configure and control the CALC2 operations on readings stored in the buffer FORMat lt name gt CALCulate2 FORMat lt name gt Specify CALC2 format Parameters lt name gt NONE No calculations MEAN Mean value of readings in buffer SDEViation Standard deviation of readings in buffer MAXimum Largest reading in buffer MINimum Lowest reading in buffer Query FORMat Query programmed math format Description This command is used to specify the format for the CALC2 math calculation The calculation operations for CALC2 use data stored in the buffer With NONE selecte
191. lay by pressing EXIT gt A QuickBASIC 4 5 programming Programming examples are written in Microsoft QuickBASIC 4 5 using the Keithley KPC 488 2 or Capital Equipment Corporation IEFE interface and the HP style Universal Language Driver CECHP Install the universal language driver Before any programming example can be run the Universal Language Driver must first be installed To install the driver from the DOS prompt enter this command cechp If you include the CECHP command in your AUTOEXEC BAT file the driver will automatically be installed each time you turn on your computer Remote Operation 4 11 About program fragments Program fragments are used to demonstrate proper programming syntax Only a fragment of the whole program is used to avoid redundancy At the beginning of each program driver files have to be opened The input terminator should be set for CRLF For example OPEN ieee FOR OUTPUT AS 1 OPEN ieee FOR INPUT AS 2 PRINT 1 interm crlf A typical program fragment includes an OUTPUT command and an ENTER command The OUTPUT command sends a program message command string to the Model 2010 Multimeter If the program message includes a query command then the ENTER command is required to get the response message from the Model 2010 Multimeter The ENTER command addresses the Model 2010 Multimeter to talk The following example program fragment demonstrates how OUTPUT and ENTER commands are used
192. lect the present operating status of the instrument See EVENt for register bit descriptions After sending one of these commands and addressing the Model 2010 to talk a decimal value is sent to the computer The binary equivalent of this decimal value indicates which bits in the register are set For example if sending stat meas cond returns a decimal value of 512 binary 0000001000000000 bit B9 of the Measurement Condition Register is set indicating that the trace buffer is full Return registers to default conditions When this command is sent the SCPI event registers are affected as follows All bits of the following registers are cleared to zero 0 e Questionable Event Enable Register e Measurement Event Enable Register e Operation Event Enable Register NOTE Registers not included in the above list are not affected by this command SCPI Command Reference 5 61 QUEue commands NEXT STATus QUEue NEXT Read Error Queue Description As error and status messages occur they are placed into the Error Queue This query command is used to read those messages The Error Queue is a first in first out FIFO register Each time you read the queue the oldest message is read and that message is then removed from the queue The queue will hold up to ten messages If the queue becomes full the 350 Queue Overflow message will occupy the last memory location in the register On power up the Error Queue is
193. ls 196 199 Commands E IEEE 488 Bus Overview INtPOdUCH ON csi ee ee E 2 BUS GeSCLIPUlOM ccsteisesscevenennasceduieds sus pysadar are E 2 Bus IES alara E ERN E 4 Data INES eia a A E 4 Bus management lines ssessseeesseseesesreersreerrsreresreseeesreresre E 4 Handshake lines nsoosnnnnssonnsenesonenesssserreessssesensssreresssnerreessne E 5 B s commands erpina AEE EIN E 6 Uniline commands cccccecsssscceeeesssececeesssnseeeeeessseeeeeees E 7 Universal multiline commands cc cccccsssssseceeeessseeeeees E 7 Addressed multiline commands ccssccccceessseeeeeeeeeseeees E 8 Address COMMANAS o ccsccccceessssseceecesssseecceeessaeeeeecessnaeees E 8 Umaddress commands cccsssscceeeesssnececeesssnseeeeeeseseeeceees E 8 Common commands cccesessseceeeesssceeecessssseeeeeesesseeeeeees E 9 SCPI commands ccccccccesssssecceesssseceeceeseseeeceeesssneeeeeeesees E 9 Command CODES rispe os E o aat ar E 9 Typical command sequences ssesseesseeesresesreresreserreerreeses E 11 TEEE command groups ssseeseeesesseeessesresesreeersrsrrsreressesreses E 12 Interface function codes s ssoosseeesseesosnsssennesessseeenssnsreensssereene E 13 F IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Introduction sae A E eee F 2 List of Illustrations 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 3 Fi
194. lue simulated reference junction temperature Restore factory default conditions Reading with prefix Reading without prefix Reading and buffer location with prefix Reading and buffer location without prefix Reading and channel with prefix Reading and channel without prefix Reading buffer location and channel with prefix Reading buffer location and channel without prefix Disable Reading overflow Data store full Data store half full Reading done Ready Error D 4 Models 196 199 Commands Table D 1 cont Models 196 199 device dependent command summary Mode Command Description EOI and bus hold off KO Enable EOI and bus hold off on X K1 Disable EOI enable bus hold off on X K2 Enable EOI disable bus hold off on X K3 Disable both EOI and bus hold off on X Terminator YO CR LF Y1 LF CR Y2 CR Y3 LF Status UO Send machine status word 199 format only U1 Send error conditions only supports no scanner IDDC IDDCO U2 Send Translator word list since Translator is not sup ported replies with one space character U3 Send buffer size U4 Send current value of V 199 format equivalent to U7 for 196 U5 Send input switch status front rear 199 format equivalent to U8 for 196 U6 Send simulated temperature set by HO Multiplex AO Auto Cal multiplex disabled Al Auto Cal multiplex enabled Delay Wn n delay period in milliseconds Oms to 999999ms Display Da Display up to 12 cha
195. m running SE 171 Waiting in trigger layer SE 174 Re entering the idle layer SE 301 Reading overflow SE 302 Low limit 1 event SE 303 High limit 1 event SE 304 Low limit 2 event SE 305 High limit 2 event SE 306 Reading available SE 307 Voltmeter complete SE B 3 B 4 Status and Error Messages Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Number Description Event 308 Buffer available SE 309 Buffer half full SE 310 Buffer full SE 311 Buffer overflow SE Calibration messages 400 10 vde zero error EE 401 100 vdc zero error EE 402 10 vdc full scale error EE 403 10 vde full scale error EE 404 100 vdc full scale error EE 405 100 vdc full scale error EE 406 1k 2 w zero error EE 407 10k 2 w zero error EE 408 100k 2 w zero error EE 409 10M 2 w zero error EE 410 10M 2 w full scale error EE 411 10M 2 w open error EE 412 1k 4 w zero error EE 413 10k 4 w zero error EE 414 100k 4 w zero error EE 415 10M 4 w sense lo zero error EE 416 1k 4 w full scale error EE 417 10k 4 w full scale error EE 418 100k 4 w full scale error EE 419 1M 4 w full scale error EE 420 10M 4 w full scale error EE 421 10m adc zero error EE 422 100m adc zero error EE 423 10m adc full scale error EE 424 100m adc full scale error EE 425 1 adc full scale error EE 438 Date of calibration not set EE 439 Next date of calibration not set EE 440 Gain aperture correction error EE 450 100m vac dac error E
196. mand codes IEEE 488 Bus Overview E 11 Typical command sequences For the various multiline commands a specific bus sequence must take place to properly send the command In particular the correct listen address must be sent to the instrument before it will respond to addressed commands Table E 3 lists a typical bus sequence for sending the addressed multiline commands In this instance the SDC command is being sent to the instrument UNL is generally sent as part of the sequence to ensure that no other active listeners are present Note that ATN is true for both the listen command and the SDC command byte itself Table E 3 Typical addressed command sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low 0 30 48 3 SDC Stays low EOT 04 4 4 Returns high Assumes primary address 16 Table E 4 gives a typical common command sequence In this instance ATN is true while the instrument is being addressed but it is set high while sending the common command string Table E 4 Typical addressed command sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low 0 30 48 3 Data Set high 2A 42 4 Data Stays high R 52 82 5 Data Stays high S 53 83 6 Data Stays high T 54 84 Assumes primary address 16 E 12 IEEE 488 Bus Overview IEEE command groups Command groups supp
197. mand Query Active State OQAS In OQAS the instrument continuously monitors the No Operation Pending flag After the last pending overlapped command is completed No Operation Pending flag set to true an ASCII character 1 is placed into the Output Queue the Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte sets and the instrument goes back into OQIS Addressing the Model 2010 to talk sends the ASCII 1 to the computer Note that the instrument always goes into OQAS when OPC is executed If no pending command operations are present e g trigger model in idle state the Model 2010 immediately places an ASCII 1 in the Output Queue sets the MAV bit and returns to OQIS When used with the INITiate or INITiate CONTinuous ON command an ASCII 1 will not be sent to the Output Queue and the MAV bit will not set until the Model 2010 goes back into the idle state The initiate operations are not considered finished until the instrument goes into the idle state When used with the TRG command an ASCII 1 will not be placed into the Output Queue and the MAV bit will not set until the operations associated with the TRG command and the initiate command are finished The TRG command is considered to be finished when the Device Action completes or when operation stops at a control source to wait for an event To use OPC exclusively with the TRG command first force the completion of the initiate command so that only th
198. mits test to lt lt gt sort 1002 10 resistors lt lt 909 110Q LO Limit HI Limit The CALC3 LIMit2 subsystem has all the same commands available as the CALC3 LIMit 1 subsystem From the front panel the same menu is used to control the beeping state and conditions inside or outside for both limits Since there is only one beeper there are two distinct tones used for the two limits but limit set 1 will take precedence Example Power up with default limits HLIM1 1 LLIM1 1 HLIM2 2 LLIM2 2 Set the beeper to beep inside Then apply 0 9 volts The beep will be higher in pitch When the voltage is increased past 1V the input is no longer inside limit set 1 but is still inside limit set 2 At that point the tone of the beep will change indicating that you are still inside limit set 2 NOTE Limit I takes priority over Limit 2 when beeper is set to outside No change in tone will be detected 3 20 Measurement Options Scan operations The Model 2010 can be used with an internal scanner card Model 2000 SCAN or 2001 TCSCAN or with external scanner cards installed in switching mainframes such as the Models 707 7001 and 7002 The following paragraphs discuss various aspects of using scanning with the Model 2010 Scanning overview A scanner lets you switch among a number of input signals to the Model 2010 for measurement The channel control and scanning capabilities depend on whether an internal or external
199. mmands and subsystems to configure the Trigger Model These commands and subsystems are summarized in Table 5 10 INITiate commands IMMediate INITiate IMMediate Take 2010 out of idle state Description This command takes the Model 2010 out of the idle state After all programmed operations are completed the instrument returns to the idle state if continuous initiation is disabled see next command CONTinuous lt b gt INITiate CONTinuous lt b gt Control continuous initiation Parameters lt b gt Oor OFF Disable continuous initiation lorON Enable continuous initiation Query CONTinuous Query continuous initiation Description When continuous initiation is selected ON the instrument is taken out of the idle state At the conclusion of all programmed operations the instrument returns to the top of the trigger model NOTE With continuous initiation enabled ON you cannot use the READ command or set sample count greater than one see iSAMPle COUN1 ABORt command ABORt Abort operation Description When this action command is sent the Model 2010 aborts operation and returns to the top of the Trigger Model If continuous initiation is disabled the instrument goes to the idle state If continuous initiation is enabled operation continues at the top of the trigger model The abort command resets the scan pointer back to the first channel in the scan list 5 74 SCPI Command Reference TRIGger command
200. msec TRIGger TIMer DEFault Sets timer to 0 1 sec TRIGger TIMer MINimum Sets timer to 1 msec TRIGger TIMer MAXimum Sets timer to 999999 999 sec lt list gt List Specifies one or more switching channels ROUTe SCAN 1 10 Specify scan list 1 10 ROUTe SCAN 2 4 6 Specify scan list 2 4 and 6 Angle Brackets lt gt Used to denote a parameter type Do not include the brackets in the program message HOLD STATe lt b gt The lt b gt indicates that a Boolean type parameter is required Thus to enable the Hold feature you must send the command with the ON or 1 parameter as follows HOLD STATe ON or 1 Remote Operation 4 29 Query commands The Query command requests the presently programmed status It is identified by the question mark at the end of the fundamental form of the command Most commands have a query form TRIGger TIMer Queries the timer interval Most commands that require a numeric parameter lt n gt can also use the DEFault MINimum and MAXimum parameters for the query form These query forms are used to determine the RST default value and the upper and lower limits for the fundamental command TRIGger TIMer DEFault Queries the RST default value TRIGger TIMer MINimum Queries the lowest allowable value TRIGger TIMer MAXimum Queries the largest allowable value Case sensitivity Common commands and SCPI commands are not case sensitive You can use upper or lower case
201. multiline commands these commands are transmitted with ATN true LLO Local Lockout LLO is sent to the instrument to lock out the LOCAL key and all their front panel controls DCL Device Clear DCL is used to return instruments to some default state Instruments usually return to their power up conditions SPE Serial Poll Enable SPE is the first step in the serial polling sequence which is used to determine which device has requested service SPD Serial Poll Disable SPD is used by the controller to remove all devices on the bus from the serial poll mode and is generally the last command in the serial polling sequence E 8 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Addressed multiline commands Addressed commands are multiline commands that must be preceded by the device listen address before that instrument will respond to the command in question Note that only the addressed device will respond to these commands Both the commands and the address preceding it are sent with ATN true SDC Selective Device Clear The SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command except that only the addressed device responds Generally instruments return to their power up default conditions when responding to the SDC command GTL Go To Local The GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode With some instruments GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previously locked out with the LLO
202. n idle which by definition completes the initiate command Since continuous initiation is on operation continues into the Trigger Model After sending the TRG command the OPC bit sets when the TRG command is finished Program Fragment GOSUB Read Register PRINT 1 output 16 cont off abort PRINT 1 output 16 SLEEP 2 GOSUB ReadRegister PRINT 1 output 16 GOSUB ReadRegister END ReadRegister PRINT 1 enter 16 LINE INPUT 2 a PRINT a RETURN PRINT 1 output 16 init init opc abort esr Remote Operation 4 39 Clear register by reading it Place 2010 in idle Start measurements and send OPC Wait two seconds Read register to show that OPC is not set Place 2010 back in idle Read register to show that OPC is now set Query Standard Event Status Reg ister Get response message from 2010 Read decimal value of register 4 40 Remote Operation OPC Operation Complete Query Place a 1 in the output queue after all pending operations are completed Description On power up or when the CLS or RST is executed the Model 2010 goes into the Operation Complete Command Query Idle State OQIS In this state no pending overlapped commands exist The Model 2010 has three overlapped commands e INITiate e INITiate CONTinuous ON e TRG When you send the OPC command the Model 2010 exits from OQIS and enters the Operation Complete Com
203. n in Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Model 2010 Continuity measurements Resistance Under Test Note Source current flows from the INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals Threshold resistance level You can define a threshold resistance from 1Q to 1000Q The factory setting is 10Q Follow these steps to define the resistance level 1 Press SHIFT then CONT Use the lt q and gt keys to choose a numerical place and use the A and W keys to increment or decrement the digits Enter a value from 1 to 1000 3 Press ENTER to confirm your setting Basic Measurements 2 37 Testing diodes With a Model 2010 you can measure the forward voltage drop of general purpose diodes and the zener voltage of zener diodes To test diodes press SHIFT then r set the test current range connect the diode and take a reading from the display NOTE _ Diode test has a non selectable reading rate of MEDium 1 PLC Connections Connect the diode leads to the INPUT HI and INPUT LO terminals on the Model 2010 The test current flows from the INPUT HI terminal as shown in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 Model 2010 Diode testing N General Purpose Diode Zener Diode Note Source current flows from the INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals Range You can set the test current range from the front panel The choices are 1mA 100pA and 10uA The factory test current setting is mA To set the test current perform the following steps 1 Pre
204. n one or more of the following ways e Unexpected offset voltages e Inconsistent readings between ranges e Sudden shifts in reading To minimize pick up keep the voltage source and the Model 2010 away from strong AC magnetic sources The voltage induced due to magnetic flux is proportional to the area of the loop formed by the input leads Therefore minimize the loop area of the input leads and connect each signal at only one point Thermal EMFs Thermal EMFs thermoelectric potentials are generated by thermal differences between the junctions of dissimilar metals These can be large compared to the signal that the Model 2010 can measure Thermal EMFs can cause the following conditions e Instability or zero offset is much higher than expected The reading is sensitive to and responds to temperature changes This effect can be demonstrated by touching the circuit by placing a heat source near the circuit or by a regular pattern of instability corresponding to changes in sunlight or the activation of heating and air conditioning systems To minimize the drift caused by thermal EMFs use copper leads to connect the circuit to the Model 2010 A banana plug generates a few microvolts A clean copper conductor such as 10 bus wire is ideal for this application The leads to the input may be shielded or unshielded as necessary Widely varying temperatures within the circuit can also create thermal EMFs Therefore maintain constan
205. n state Note that the DCL command is not an addressed command so all instruments equipped to implement DCL will do so simultaneously When the Model 2010 Multimeter receives a DCL command it clears the Input Buffer and Output Queue cancels deferred commands and clears any command that prevents the processing of any other device command A DCL does not affect instrument settings and stored data Program fragment PRINT 1 clear Clear all devices 4 14 Remote Operation SDC selective device clear The SDC command is an addressed command that performs essentially the same function as the DCL command However since each device must be individually addressed the SDC command provides a method to clear only selected instruments instead of clearing all instruments simultaneously as is the case with DCL Program fragment PRINT 1 clear 16 Clear 2010 GET group execute trigger GET is a GPIB trigger that is used as an arm scan and or measure event to control operation The Model 2010 Multimeter reacts to this trigger if it is the programmed control source The control source is programmed from the SCPI TRIGger subsystem With the instrument programmed and waiting for a GPIB trigger the following program fragment will provide the GET Program fragment PRINT 1 trigger 16 Trigger 2010 from over the bus This sends IEEE 488 commands UNT UNL LISTEN 16 GET When the command is executed the trigger event occurs The
206. n your program must wait until the Model 2010 has completed an operation it is more efficient to program the 2010 to assert the IEEE 488 SRQ line when it is finished rather than repeatedly serial polling the instrument An IEEE 488 controller will typically address the instrument to talk and then unaddress it each time it performs a serial poll Repeated polling of the Model 2010 will generally reduce its overall reading throughput Therefore use the srq function call The Model 2010 provides a status bit for almost every operation it performs It can be pro grammed to assert the IEEE 488 SRQ line whenever a status bit becomes true or false The TEEE 488 controller your computer can examine the state of the SRQ line without performing a serial poll thereby detecting when the 2010 has completed its task without interrupting it in the process The following example program segment sets up the Model 2010 to assert SRQ when the reading buffer has completely filled and then arms the reading buffer initiates readings and waits for the Model 2010 to indicate that the buffer is full This is not a complete program The commands to configure the trigger model and the reading buffer see the next example are not shown The example shown here can be modified for any event in the Model 2010 status reporting system Reset STATus subsystem not affected by RST CALL SEND 16 Stat pres cls status CALL SEND 16 Stat meas enab 512 status
207. nal EXTernal is used to measure channels that are controlled by an external switch system When EXTernal is selected the Model 2010 scans the external scan list see SCAN EXTernal When NONE is used the Model 2010 disables all operations associated with a scan SCPI Command Reference 5 37 SENSe 1 subsystem The Sense 1 Subsystem is used to configure and control the measurement functions of the Model 2010 A function does not have to be selected before you program its various configurations A function can be selected any time after it has been programmed Whenever a programmed function is selected it assumes the programmed states FUNCtion Command FUNCtion lt name gt SENSe 1 FUNCtion lt name gt Parameters Query Description Select measurement function lt name gt CURRent AC Select AC Current CURRent DC Select DC Current VOLTage AC Select AC Voltage VOLTage DC Select DC Voltage RESistance Select two wire Resistance FRESistance Select four wire Resistance PERiod Select Period FREQuency Select Frequency TEMPerature Select Temperature DIODe Select Diode Testing CONTinuity Select Continuity Testing FUNCtion Query presently programmed function The FUNCtion command is used to select the measurement function of the instrument Note that parameter names are enclosed in single quotes Howev
208. nary formats Query BORDer Query byte order Description This command is used to control the byte order for the IEEE754 binary formats For normal byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte 1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Single precision Bytel Byte2 Byte 8 Double precision For reverse byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte4 Byte3 Byte2 Bytel Single precision Byte8 Byte7 Byte 1 Double precision The 0 Header is not affected by this command The Header is always sent at the beginning of the data string for each measurement conversion The ASCII data format can only be sent in the normal byte order The SWAPped selection is ignored when the ASCII format is selected SCPI Command Reference 5 31 ELEMents command ELEMents lt item list gt FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt Parameters lt item list gt READing Includes reading in data string CHANnel Includes channel number UNITs Includes units NOTE Each item in the list must be separated by a comma Query ELEMents Query elements in data string Description This command is used to specify the elements to be included in the data string for each measurement conversion You can specify from one to all three elements Each element in the list must be separated by a comma These elements shown in Figure 5 1 are explained in the following paragraphs READing Instrument reading The resolution of t
209. nce lt n gt Specify reference 1010 to 1010 0 y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe Query state of reference 0 or 1 y ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value V DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 8 8 DIGits Query resolution AVERage Path to configure and control the filter TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note TCONtrol Query filter type COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter OFF STATe Query state of digital filter TERMinal lt name gt Select terminal type NORMal or SENSe NORMal TERMinal Query terminal type RATio lt b gt Takes ratio of input sense terminal RATio Query ratio state STERminals Path to sense terminal commands RANGe Path to configure measurement range UPPer lt NRf gt Specify STERminal range 0 to 10 1 1 000000 UPPer Query range AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable sense terminal autorange ON AUTO Query sense terminal autorange REFerence lt NRf gt Specify reference REL value for sense terminals 0 10 1 to 10 1 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable sense terminal reference REL OFF STATe Query sense terminal reference REL state ACQuire Use and save sense terminal input as new reference REFerence Query sense terminal reference REL value 5 14 SCPI Command Refe
210. nce impedance with input impedance The input impedance of the instrument is not modified by the dBm parameter If a relative value is in effect when dBm is selected the value is converted to dBm and then REL is applied to dBm If REL is applied after dBm has been selected dBm math has REL applied to it Basic Measurements 2 35 Configuration To set the reference impedance perform the following steps 1 After selecting dBm the present reference impedance is displayed 1 9999Q REF 0075 2 To change the reference impedance use the q and gt keys to select the numeric position Then use the A and Y keys to select the desired value Be sure to press ENTER after changing the reference impedance NOTES dBm is valid for positive and negative values of DC volts The mX b and percent math operations are applied after the dBm or dB math For example if mX b is selected with m 10 and b 0 the display will read 10 000 MX for a IVDC signal If dBm is selected with Zggr 50Q the display will read 130MX dB calculation Expressing DC or AC voltage in dB makes it possible to compress a large range of measurements into a much smaller scope The relationship between dB and voltage is defined by the following equation Vin dB 201 F Ver where Vjyy is the DC or AC input signal Vrer is the specified voltage reference level The instrument will read OdB when the reference voltage level is applied to the input If a rel
211. nd Reference 5 19 Table 5 10 Trigger command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter sINITiate Subsystem command path V IMMediate Initiate one trigger cycle y CONTinuous lt b gt Enable or disable continuous initiation Note 1 y CONTinuous Query continuous initiation V ABORt Reset trigger system y TRIGger Subsystem command path y SEQuence 1 Path to program Trigger Layer y COUNt lt n gt Set measure count 1 to 9999 or INF Note 2 y COUNt Query measure count y DELay lt n gt Set delay 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 V AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto delay ON V AUTO Query state of delay y DELay Query delay y SOURce lt name gt Select control source IMMediate TIMer IMMediate V MANual BUS or EXTernal SOURce Query control source V TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval 0 001 to 999999 999 sec 0 1 y TIMer Request the programmed timer interval y SIGNal Loop around control source V SAMPle COUNt lt NRf gt Specify sample count 1 to 1024 1 COUNt Query sample count Notes 1 Defaults for continuous initiation SYSTem PRESet enables continuous initiation RST disables continuous initiation 2 Defaults for count SYSTem PRESet sets the count to INF infinite RST sets the count to 1 5 20 SCPI Command Reference Table 5 11 UNIT command summary Command Description a SCPI parameter UNIT TEMPerature lt name gt Select temperature measurement units C
212. nel is the 2 pole 4 pole relay and is controlled by the multiple channel commands See Multiple channel control for details on controlling channel 11 Sending rout open all disables scan operation sets LSELect to NONE see Scan commands 5 34 SCPI Command Reference Multiple channel control The following commands let you close one or more channels at the same time They also let you manually select the 2 pole or 4 pole mode of operation CLOSe lt list gt ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe lt list gt Close specified channels Parameter lt list gt chanlist Specify channels to close where chanlist is the list of channels 1 through 11 to be closed This command lets you have multiple channels closed at the same time When this command is sent the channels specified in the chanlist will close Pole mode is not affected by the selected measurement function Instead it is selected by controlling channel 11 which is the 2 pole 4 pole relay Closing channel 11 selects the 2 pole mode When channel 11 is open the 4 pole mode is selected Use the rout multiple open lt list gt command to open channel 11 Examples of a list list 1 3 5 Channels 1 3 and 5 1 5 Channels 1 through 5 When this command is sent the front panel channel number annunciators are disabled Use the following query command to determine which channels are closed CLOSe STATe ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe STATe Query closed channels Des
213. ng front panel TALK or LSTN lights if the instrument was previously placed in one of those states Remote Operation 4 13 Note that this command does not affect the status of the instrument settings data and event registers are not changed To send the IFC command the controller must set the IFC line true for a minimum of 100us Program fragment PRINT 1 output 16 idn Send query command PRINT 1 enter 16 Read data turn on TALK annunciator SLEEP 3 Wait 3 seconds PRINT 1 abort Talker idle state turn off TALK annunciator LLO local lockout Use the LLO command to prevent local operation of the instrument After the unit receives LLO all its front panel controls except the POWER are inoperative In this state pressing the LOCAL will not restore control to the front panel The GTL command restores control to the front panel Program fragment PRINT 1 remote 16 Place 2010 in remote PRINT 1 local lockout Lock out front panel including LOCAL key SLEEP 6 Wait 6 seconds PRINT 1 local 16 Restore front panel operation GTL go to local Use the GTL command to put a remote mode instrument into local mode The GTL command also restores front panel key operation Program fragment PRINT 1 remote 16 Place 2010 in remote SLEEP 3 Wait 3 seconds PRINT 1 local 16 Place 2010 in local mode DCL device clear Use the DCL command to clear the GPIB interface and return it to a know
214. nge The AUTO key has no effect on the temperature continuity and diode test functions Filter Filter lets you set the filter response to stabilize noisy measurements The Model 2010 uses a digital filter The displayed stored or transmitted reading is simply an average of a number of reading conversions from 1 to 100 To select a filter 1 Use the FILTER button to enable the filter The FILT annunciator will come on when FILTER is enabled 2 Press SHIFT then TYPE 3 Usethe lt gt A and W keys to select the number of readings and then press ENTER 4 Use the lt q gt A and W keys to select the type of filter desired moving average or repeating and then press ENTER The FILT annunciator turns on When a filter is enabled the selected filter configuration for that measurement function is in effect Pressing FILTER once disables the filter NOTE The filter can be set for any measurement function except frequency period continuity and diode test 3 4 Measurement Options Filter types The moving average filter Figure 3 1 uses a first in first out stack When the stack becomes full the measurement conversions are averaged yielding a reading For each subsequent conversion placed into the stack the oldest conversion is discarded and the stack is re averaged yielding a new reading For the repeating filter Figure 3 1 the stack is filled and the conversions are averaged to yield a reading Th
215. nge for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto range for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto range for Q4 SENSe 1 VOLT DC STERminals RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto range for sense terminals Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable auto range 0 or OFF Disable auto range Query AUTO Query auto range on or off Description These commands are used to control auto ranging With auto ranging enabled the instrument automatically goes to the most sensitive range to perform the measurement The auto range command RANGe AUTO is coupled to the command that manually selects the measurement range RANGe lt n gt When auto range is enabled the parameter value for RANGe lt n gt changes to the automatically selected range value Thus when auto range is disabled the instrument remains at the automatically selected range When a valid RANGe lt n gt command is sent auto ranging disables SCPI Command Reference 5 43 REFerence lt n gt commands REFerence lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent AC REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent DC REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for DCI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for DCV SENSe 1 RESistance REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for Q2 SENSe 1 FRESistance REFerence lt n gt Specify reference for Q4
216. nly lit when conditions in the table are met In other case the annunciators are turned off Table 3 1 Rate settings for the measurement functions Rate Function Fast Medium Slow DCV DCI NPLC 0 1 NPLC 1 NPLC 5 ACV ACI NPLC 1 BW 300 NPLC X BW 30 NPLC X BW 3 Q2W Q4W NPLC 0 1 NPLC 1 NPLC 5 FREQ PERIOD APER 1s APER 1s APER 1s dB dBm ACV NPLC 1 BW 300 NPLC X BW 30 NPLC X BW 3 dB dBm DCV NPLC 0 1 NPLC 1 NPLC 5 Continuity NPLC 0 1 N A N A Diode test N A NPLC 1 N A Notes NPLC number of power line cycles BW lower limit of bandwidth in Hz APER aperture in seconds N A not available X setting ignored 3 8 Measurement Options Trigger operations The following paragraphs discuss front panel triggering the programmable trigger delay the reading hold feature and external triggering Trigger model The flowchart in Figure 3 2 summarizes triggering as viewed from the front panel It is called a trigger model because it is modeled after the SCPI commands used to control triggering Note that for stepping and scanning the trigger model has additional control blocks These are described later in this section Figure 3 2 Cue gt Front panel triggering Y Control Event Source Detection without stepping scanning Immediate External y Output Delay Trigger A gt Device Action I
217. nsists of two spade lugs two alligator clips and two spring hook test probes The spade lugs and alligator clips are rated at 30V RMS 42 4V peak the test probes are rated at 1000V These components are for use with high performance test leads terminated with banana plugs such as the Model 8605 The following test leads and probes are rated at 30V RMS 42 4V peak Models 5805 and 5805 12 Kelvin Probes Consists of two spring loaded Kelvin test probes with banana plug termination Designed for instruments that measure four terminal resistance The Model 5805 is 0 9m long the Model 5805 12 is 3 6m long Model 5806 Kelvin Clip Lead Set Includes two Kelvin clip test leads 0 9m with banana plug termination Designed for instruments that measure four terminal resistance A set of eight replacement rubber bands is available Keithley P N GA 22 Model 8604 SMD Probe Set Consists of two test leads 0 9m each terminated with a surface mount device grabber clip on one end and a banana plug with a retractable sheath on the other end Low thermal probes Model 8610 Low Thermal Shorting Plug Consists of four banana plugs mounted to a 1 inch square circuit board interconnected to provide a short circuit among all plugs Cables and adapters Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 Shielded GPIB Cables Connect the Model 2010 to the GPIB bus using shielded cables and connectors to reduce electromagnetic interference EMI The Model 7007
218. nt by the instrument to the computer in response to a query command program message Sending a response message After sending a query command the response message is placed in the Output Queue When the Model 2010 Multimeter is addressed to talk the response message is sent from the Output Queue to the computer Multiple response messages If you send more than one query command in the same program message see Multiple Command Messages the multiple response messages for all the queries is sent to the computer when the Model 2010 is addressed to talk The responses are sent in the order that the query commands were sent and are separated by semicolons Items within the same query are separated by commas The following example shows the response message for a program message that contains four single item query commands 0 1 1 0 Response message terminator RMT Each response is terminated with an LF line feed and EOI end or identify The following example shows how a multiple response message is terminated 0 1 1 0 lt RMT gt Message exchange protocol Two rules summarize the message exchange protocol Rule 1 Always tell the Model 2010 what to send to the computer The following two steps must always be performed to send information from the instrument other computer 1 Send the appropriate query command s in a program message 2 Address the Model 2010 to talk Rule 2 The complete response mess
219. nts OSB Operation Summary Bit 0 Event Bit Cleared MSS Master Summary Status RQS Request Service ESB Event Summary Bit MAV Message Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit TRG Trigger Send bus trigger to 2010 Description Use the TRG command to issue a GPIB trigger to the Model 2010 It has the same effect as a group execute trigger GET Use the TRG command as an event to control operation The Model 2010 reacts to this trigger if BUS is the programmed control source The control source is programmed from the TRIGger subsystem see Section 5 TST2 Self Test Query Run self test and read result Description Use this query command to perform a checksum test on ROM The command places the coded result 0 or 1 in the Output Queue When the Model 2010 is addressed to talk the coded result is sent from the Output Queue to the computer A returned value of zero 0 indicates that the test passed and a value of one 1 indicates that the test failed 4 46 Remote Operation WAI Wait to Continue Prevent execution of commands until previous com mands are completed Description Two types of device commands exist e Sequential commands A command whose operations are allowed to finish before the next command is executed e Overlapped commands A command that allows the execution of subsequent commands while device operations of the Overlapped command are
220. nuity Diode testing 100mV lms 100mV 400ms 100mV lms 10mA 2ms 10Q 3ms 10Q 3ms 1V lms 1V 400ms 1V lms 100mA 2ms 1009 3ms 1009 13ms 1kQ 3ms ImA lms 10V lms 10V 400ms 10V lms 1A 2ms 1A 400ms 1kQ 3ms 100pA lms Range and delay 100V 1000V 5ms 5ms 100V 750V 400ms_ 400ms 100V 750V lms lms 3A 2ms 3A 400ms 10kQ 100kQ 13ms 25ms 10pA lms IMQ 100ms 10MQ 150ms 100MQ 250ms The delay function is accessed by pressing the SHIFT DELAY keys The present delay setting AUTO or MANual is displayed Use the A and W keys to select the type of delay If MANual is chosen also enter the duration of the delay The maximum is 99H 99M 99 999S Press ENTER to accept the delay or EXIT for no change Changing the delay to MANual on one function changes the delays on all functions to MANual 3 10 Measurement Options Device actions The primary device action is a measurement However the device action block could include the following additional actions Filtering If the repeating filter is enabled the instrument samples the specified number of reading conversions to yield single filtered reading Only one reading conversion is performed if the filter is disabled or after the specified number of reading conversions for a moving average filter is reached The output of filter feeds hold e Hold With hold enabled the first
221. o that channel is displayed Note that for 4 pole operation the annunciator for the paired channel is not displayed For example if channel pair 4 and 9 is closed only the CH4 annunciator is displayed SCPI Command Reference 5 33 CLOSe STATe ROUTe CLOSe STATe Query closed channel or channel pair Description The response message for this query command indicates the channel or channel pair that has been closed on the internal scanner card using the rout close lt chan num gt command or channels closed from the front panel Note that for 4 pole operation the paired channel is not included in the response message For example if channel pair 4 and 9 has been closed the 4 response message will be returned NOTE For 4 pole operation the rout mult close query command includes the paired channel in the response message see Multiple channel control The rout close query command will not indicate channels that have been closed using the rout mult close lt list gt command see Multiple channel control Channels cannot be closed if a scan internal or external is presently enabled See the LSELect lt name gt command in Scan commands to disable scan operations OPEN ALL ROUTe OPEN ALL Description Open all input channels This command is used to open all input channels 1 through 10 on the internal scanner card The only channel this command will not open is channel 11 This chan
222. o the talker are addressed to listen by the controller Each listener is then referred to as an active listener Devices that do not need to listen are instructed to unlisten The reason for the unlisten instruction is to optimize the speed of bus information transfer since the task of listening takes up bus time Through the use of control lines a handshake sequence takes place in the transfer process of information from a talker to a listener This handshake sequence helps ensure the credibility of the information transfer The basic handshake sequence between an active controller talker and a listener is as follows 1 The listener indicates that it is ready to listen The talker places the byte of data on the bus and indicates that the data is available to the listener 3 The listener aware that the data is available accepts the data and then indicates that the data has been accepted 4 The talker aware that the data has been accepted stops sending data and indicates that data is not being sent 5 The listener aware that there is no data on the bus indicates that it is ready for the next byte of data Bus description The IEEE 488 bus which is also referred to as the GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus was designed as a parallel transfer medium to optimize data transfer without using an excessive number of bus lines In keeping with this goal the bus has only eight data lines that are used for both data and with most command
223. of 1 for DCV is 1V on all measurement ranges STATE lt b gt CALCulate3 LIMit 1 STATe lt b gt CALCulate3 LIMit2 STATe lt b gt 0 or off 1 or on Parameters lt b gt Control LIMIT1 test Control LIMIT2 test Disable limit test Enable limit test STATe This command is used to enable or disable the LIMIT 1 or LIMIT2 test When enabled the test sequence for limits will be performed each time the instru ment performs a measurement Query state on or off of limit test Query Description A failed indication see FAIL for LIMIT1 or LIMIT2 is cleared when the limit test is disabled SCPI Command Reference 5 25 FAIL CALCulate3 LIMit 1 FAIL Read LIMIT1 test result CALCulate3 LIMit2 FAIL Read LIMIT2 test result Description This command is used to read the results of the LIMIT1 or LIMIT2 test 0 Limit test passed 1 Limit test failed The response message 0 or 1 only tells you if a limit test has passed or failed It does not tell you which limit upper or lower has failed To determine which limit has failed read the Measurement Event Register Reading the results of a limit test does not clear the fail indication of the test A failure can be cleared by using a CLEar command or by disabling the test STATe OFF CLEar commands IMMediate CALCulate3 LIMit 1 CLEar IMMediate Clear LIMIT1 test failure CALCulate3 LIMit2 CLEar IMMediate Clear LIMIT2 test failure Descrip
224. ogical eer D A OR Calibration Summary _Cal Cal Cal Hy 9 9 9 gt 10 10 _10 S fi 11 m gt Error Queue 12 12 12 gt 13 13 13 y Command Warning Warn Warn Warn gt Always Zero _15 15 Ois A Output Queue Service Status Request Byte Enable Sanda Register Register Standard Event MSB MSB Event Status 1 9 1 Status Enable EAV D EAV Register Register OSB QSB Logical Operation Complete OPC OPC MAV MAV OR 1 1 ESB ESB Query Error QYE QYE gt RQS MsS 6 Device Specific Error DDE DDE gt OSB OSB Execution Error EXE EXE STB SRE Command Error CME_ _CME SRE User Request UR URI gt Power On E OPON Logical Master Summary Status MSS 8 8 5 J MSB Measurement Summary Bit EAV Error Available 8 8 QSB Questionable Summary Bit u H MAV Message Available T2 T2 ESB Event Summary Bit i3 13 RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Staus OSB Operation Summary Bit 14 14 Always Zero _15_ _15 Note RQS bit is in serial poll byte ESR ESE MSS bit is in STB response ESE Measurement Operation Measurement Measurement Event Operation Operation Event Condition Event Enable Condition Event Enable Register Register Register Register Register Register Reading Overfolw ROF ROF ROF 0 0 0 I Low Limit 1 LL LL LL y 1 T T High Limit 1 HLT HL HLI y 2 2 2 Low Limit 2 LL 2 LL uz 3 3 O 3 4 High Limit 2 HL 2 Ht OH H Measuring Meas Mea
225. om 0 to 30 by using the following instructions 1 Press SHIFT then GPIB Use the A and W keys to select ADDRess or press ENTER Once you have pressed ENTER the unit automatically displays the address selection 3 Use the lt q and keys to toggle from ADDRess to the numeric entry Notice the values are blinking 4 Use the A and F keys to change the numeric entries to the desired address 5 Press ENTER See Section Four Remote Operation for more GPIB information Warm up time The Model 2010 is ready for use as soon as the power up sequence has completed However to achieve rated accuracy allow the instrument to warm up for two hours If the instrument has been subjected to extreme temperatures allow additional time for internal temperatures to stabilize 2 16 Basic Measurements Display The display of the Model 2010 is primarily used to display readings along with the units and type of measurement Annunciators are located on the top bottom right and left of the reading or message display The annunciators indicate various states of operation See Figure 2 1 for a complete listing of annunciators Status and error messages Status and error messages are displayed momentarily During Model 2010 operation and programming you will encounter a number of front panel messages Typical messages are either of status or error variety as listed in Appendix B Measuring voltage The Model 2010 can make DCV meas
226. om one controller to another The IEEE 488 bus is limited to 15 devices including the controller Thus any number of talkers and listeners up to that limit may be present on the bus at one time Although several devices may be commanded to listen simultaneously the bus can have only one active talker or communications would be scrambled A device is placed in the talk or listen state by sending an appropriate talk or listen command These talk and listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address The primary E 4 Bus lines IEEE 488 Bus Overview address may have any value between 0 and 31 and is generally set by rear panel DIP switches or programmed in from the front panel of the instrument The actual listen address value sent out over the bus is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 For example if the primary address is 16 the actual listen address is 36 36 16 20 In a similar manner the talk address is obtained by ORing the primary address with 40 With the present example the talk address derived from a primary address of 16 would be 56 56 16 40 The IEEE 488 standards also include another addressing mode called secondary addressing Secondary addresses lie in the range of 60 7F Note however that many devices including the Model 2010 do not use secondary addressing Once a device is addressed to talk or listen the appropriate bus transactions take place For example i
227. ommunicate Choose one of the following available rates 19 2k e 9600 e 4800 e 2400 e 1200 e 600 e 300 The factory selected baud rate is 9600 Make sure that the programming terminal that you are connecting to the Model 2010 Multimeter can support the baud rate you selected Both the multimeter and the other device must be configured for the same baud rate To select a baud rate follow these steps 1 Access the RS 232 configuration by pressing SHIFT then RS232 You see RS232 ON assuming you have already selected the RS 232 interface 2 Go to the baud rate field by pressing the W key You see BAUD lt rate gt ad Access the baud rate list by pressing the gt key You see the rate selection blinking 4 Scroll through the available rates by pressing the VW and A key until you find the rate you want 5 Confirm your selection by pressing ENTER The multimeter prompts you to define signal handshaking Continue for information about handshaking You can return to measurement mode by pressing EXIT 4 6 Remote Operation Selecting signal handshaking flow control Signal handshaking between the controller and the instrument allows the two devices to communicate to each other regarding being ready or not ready to receive data The Model 2010 does not support hardware handshaking flow control Software flow control is in the form of X__ON and X__ OFF characters and is enabled when XonXoFF is selected from the RS23
228. on the selected range depends on the Firmware Revision of the Model 2010 The firmware revision is displayed during power up Example display message for A12 firmware REV A12 A02 Table D 2 summarizes ohms ranges for various firmware revision levels Table D 2 Range selection for ohms function Model 2010 Firmware Revision Range Command for Ohms AO through A9 A10 and A11 A12 and higher RO Auto Auto Auto R1 100Q 1kQ 100Q R2 1kQ 10kQ 1kQ R3 10kQ 100kQ 10kQ R4 100kQ IMQ 100kQ R5 IMQ 10MQ IMQ R6 10MQ 100MQ 10MQ R7 10MQ 100MQ 10MQ R8 22 22 100MQ 2 wire and 4 wire ohms E IEEE 488 Bus Overview E 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Introduction The IEEE 488 bus is a communication system between two or more electronic devices A device can be either an instrument or a computer When a computer is used on the bus it serves as a supervisor of the communication exchange between all the devices and is known as the controller Supervision by the controller consists of determining which device will talk and which device will listen As a talker a device will output information and as a listener a device will receive information To simplify the task of keeping track of the devices a unique address number is assigned to each On the bus only one device can talk at a time and is addressed to talk by the controller The device that is talking is known as the active talker The devices that need to listen t
229. operation Use a shielded cable such as Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 Power module Contains the AC line receptacle power line fuse and line voltage setting The Model 2010 can be configured for line voltages of 100V 120V 220V 240VAC at line frequencies of 45Hz to 66Hz or 360Hz to 440Hz Digital Common 2 8 Basic Measurements Power up Line power connection Follow the procedure below to connect the Model 2010 to line power and turn on the instrument 1 Check to be sure the line voltage selected on the rear panel see Figure 2 3 is correct for the operating voltage in your area If not refer to the next procedure Setting line voltage and replacing fuse CAUTION Operating the instrument on an incorrect line voltage may cause damage to the instrument possibly voiding the warranty 2 Before plugging in the power cord make sure the front panel power switch is in the off 0 position 3 Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to the AC receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet WARNING The power cord supplied with the Model 2010 contains a separate ground wire for use with grounded outlets When proper connections are made instrument chassis is connected to power line ground through the ground wire in the power cord Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in personal injury or death due to electric shock 4 Turn on the instrument by pressing the front
230. or information on the configuration options for frequency and period measurements Figure 2 8 Model 2010 Frequency and period measurements CESREREEESERRT AC Voltage 206 Source eeeeeeeee 4 6 e 2 aaapaaaaa Vv qE C GCG GD aaa Input Impedance 1MQ in parallel with lt 100pF Caution Maximum Input 1000V peak 8 x 107 Ve Hz 2 30 Basic Measurements Measuring temperature The Model 2010 can measure temperature with a four wire RTD sensor or a thermocouple The temperature measurement ranges available depend on the type of RTD or thermocouple chosen RTDs can be connected to the banana jacks on the front or rear panel Thermocouples can be connected to the Model 2001 TCSCAN card which plugs into the option slot of the Model 2010 or to an external thermocouple card such as a Model 7057A 7402 or 7014 installed in a Model 7001 or 7002 Switch System If the Model 2001 TCSCAN card is not used then an estimate of the panel temperature must be made usually 2 C above room temperature Connect the thermocouple card directly to the front panel Input HI and LO as shown in Figure 2 9 To input the panel temperature estimate choose the TCOUPLE configuration option and select JUNC Pick the SIM option and input the estimate Basic Measurements Connections Figure 2 9 Thermocouple and RTD temperature me
231. orm the following steps to set digits for a measurement function 1 Press the desired function 2 Press the DIGITS key until the desired number of digits is displayed 3 to 71 2 NOTE Frequency and period can be displayed with four to seven digits ACV AC Amps and dryckt ohms are limited to 62 digits resolution 3 6 Measurement Options Rate The rate operation sets the integration time of the A D converter the period of time the input signal is measured also known as aperture The integration time affects the usable digits the amount of reading noise as well as the ultimate reading rate of the instrument The integration time is specified in parameters based on a number of power line cycles NPLC where 1 PLC for 60Hz is 16 67msec and 1 PLC for 50Hz and 400Hz is 20msec In general the fastest integration time FAST 0 1 PLC from the front panel 0 01 PLC from the bus results in increased reading noise and fewer usable digits while the slowest integration time SLOW 5PLC from the front panel 1OPLC from the bus provides the best common mode and normal mode rejection In between settings are a compromise between speed and noise The RATE parameters are explained as follows e FAST sets integration time to 0 1 PLC Use FAST if speed is of primary importance at the expense of increased reading noise and fewer usable digits e MEDium sets integration time to 1 PLC Use MEDium when a compromise between noise performanc
232. ormed for DC voltages This function can be useful when comparing several voltages to a single voltage in a piece of equipment The sense input is used as the reference input With this function the sense terminals can be used to measure DC volts in 100mV 1V and 10V ranges Connections Assuming factory default conditions the basic procedure is 1 Connect test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals Either the front or rear inputs can be used place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position 2 Connect test leads to the SENSE HI and LO terminals Use the same inputs front or rear as in the previous step Press DCV 4 Connect SENSE LO and LO together SENSE LO and LO cannot have a voltage difference of greater than 5 of either lowest range selected 5 Press AUTO to toggle autoranging Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed with autoranging If you want manual ranging use the RANGE A and W keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected voltages 6 Press SHIFT then RATIO Use the A V lt q and gt keys to toggle RATIO to ON and SENSEIN to OFF The display will read RA for RATIO g NOTE RATIO takes priority if both RATIO and SENSE IN are toggled to ON and the display will read RS at the far right If only SENSE IN is turned ON the Model 2010 reads only the voltage present at the SENSE terminals 7 Connect test leads from the INPUT HI and LO terminals to the source to be measured 8 Connect test le
233. orted by the Model 2010 are listed in Table E 5 Common commands and SCPI commands are not included in this list Table E 5 IEEE command groups HANDSHAKE COMMAND GROUP NDAC NOT DATA ACCEPTED NRFD NOT READY FOR DATA DAV DATA VALID UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUP ATN ATTENTION DCL DEVICE CLEAR IFC INTERFACE CLEAR REN REMOTE ENABLE SPD SERIAL POLL DISABLE SPE SERIAL POLL ENABLE ADDRESS COMMAND GROUP LISTEN LAG LISTEN ADDRESS GROUP MLA MY LISTEN ADDRESS UNL UNLISTEN TALK TAG TALK ADDRESS GROUP MTA MY TALK ADDRESS UNT UNTALK OTA OTHER TALK ADDRESS ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP ACG ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP GTL GO TO LOCAL SDC SELECTIVE DEVICE CLEAR STATUS COMMAND GROUP RQS REQUEST SERVICE SRQ SERIAL POLL REQUEST STB STATUS BYTE EOI END IEEE 488 Bus Overview E 13 Interface function codes The interface function codes which are part of the IEEE 488 standards define an instrument s ability to support various interface functions and should not be confused with programming commands found elsewhere in this manual The interface function codes for the Model 2010 are listed in Table E 6 Table E 6 Model 2010 interface function codes Code Interface function SH1 Source Handshake capability AHI Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Talker basic talker talk only serial poll unaddressed to talk on LAG L4 Listener basic listener unaddressed to lis
234. ou specify a reference value The displayed reading will be expressed as a percent deviation from the reference value The percentage calculation is performed as follows Input Reference x 100 Input Percent where Input is the normal display reading Reference is the user entered constant Percent is the displayed result Configuration To configure the percent calculation perform the following steps 1 Press SHIFT then to display the present value REF 1 000000 2 Enter a reference sign value and units prefix Use the q and gt keys to choose a numerical place and use the A and W keys to increment or decrement the digits 3 Press ENTER when done The Model 2010 will display the result of the calculation The result is positive when the input exceeds the reference and negative when the input is less than the reference Engineering units are used to show values in the range nano to 1000G Exponential notation is used above that range dBm calculation dBm is defined as decibels above or below a 1mW reference With a user programmable reference impedance the Model 2010 reads OdBm when the voltage needed to dissipate 1mW through the reference impedance is applied The relationship between dBm a reference impedance and the voltage is defined by the following equation 2 Ma Zeex dBm 10 log imw Where Vy is the DC or AC input signal Zrer is the specified reference impedance NOTE Do not confuse refere
235. processed reading becomes the seed reading and operation loops back within the device action block After the next reading is processed it is checked to see if it is within the selected window 0 01 0 1 1 10 of the seed reading If the reading is within the window operation again loops back within the device action block This looping continues until the specified number 2 to 100 consecutive readings are within the window If one of the readings is not within the window the instrument acquires a new seed reading and the hold process continues e Channel closure When stepping or scanning the last device action is to open the previous channel if closed and close the next channel Using the hold feature provides an auto settling time for the scanner relays Each open close transition will restart the hold process and a reading for each channel will not occur until the relay settles Output trigger After the device action an output trigger occurs and is available at the rear panel Trigger Link connector This trigger can be used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation e g select the next channel for an external scan Counters The trigger model for stepping and scanning contains additional blocks for counting samples the number of channels to scan and counting triggers These counters are explained later in this section Reading hold autosettle When a hold reading is acquired an audible
236. protection provided by the product may be impaired The types of product users are Responsible body is the individual or group responsible for the use and maintenance of equipment for ensuring that the equip ment is operated within its specifications and operating limits and for ensuring that operators are adequately trained Operators use the product for its intended function They must be trained in electrical safety procedures and proper use of the instrument They must be protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits Maintenance personnel perform routine procedures on the product to keep it operating properly for example setting the line voltage or replacing consumable materials Maintenance procedures are described in the manual The procedures explicitly state if the operator may perform them Otherwise they should be performed only by service personnel Service personnel are trained to work on live circuits and perform safe installations and repairs of products Only properly trained service personnel may perform installation and service procedures Keithley products are designed for use with electrical signals that are rated Measurement Category I and Measurement Category TI as described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 60664 Most measurement control and data I O signals are Measurement Category I and must not be directly connected to mains voltage or to voltage sources wit
237. racter message a character D Cancel display mode Table D 1 cont Models 196 199 Commands D 5 Models 196 199 device dependent command summary Mode Command Description Scanning NO Open all stop scanning or stepping if applicable N1 Close channel 1 N2 Close channel 2 N3 Close channel 1 N4 Close channel 4 N5 Close channel 5 N6 Close channel 6 N7 Close channel 7 N8 Close channel 8 N9 Close channel 9 N10 Close channel 10 N11 Step mode max channel is 2 N12 Step mode max channel is 3 N13 Step mode max channel is 4 N14 Step mode max channel is 5 N15 Step mode max channel is 6 N16 Step mode max channel is 7 N17 Step mode max channel is 8 N18 Step mode max channel is 9 N19 Step mode max channel is 10 N20 Open all stop scanning or stepping if applicable Scanning cont N21 Scan mode max channel is 2 N22 Scan mode max channel is 3 N23 Scan mode max channel is 4 N24 Scan mode max channel is 5 N25 Scan mode max channel is 6 N26 Scan mode max channel is 7 N27 Scan mode max channel is 8 N28 Scan mode max channel is 9 N29 Scan mode max channel is 10 Thermocouple JO Type J thermocouple J1 Type K thermocouple J2 Type T thermocouple 00 Simulated reference junction for temperature function Ol Real reference junction for temperature function HO Set simulated reference junction temperature using V command 0 to 50 C D 6 Models 196 199 Commands For the ohms functi
238. range the circuit is virtually shorted Dangerous arcing can result even when the multimeter is set to a voltage range if the minimum voltage spacing is reduced in the external connections When making measurements in high energy circuits use test leads that meet the following requirements e Test leads should be fully insulated e Only use test leads that can be connected to the circuit e g alligator clips spade lugs etc for hands off measurements Do not use test leads that decrease voltage spacing These diminish arc protection and create a hazardous condition Use the following sequence when testing power circuits 1 De energize the circuit using the regular installed connect disconnect device such as a circuit breaker main switch etc 2 Attach the test leads to the circuit under test Use appropriate safety rated test leads for this application Set the multimeter to the proper function and range 4 Energize the circuit using the installed connect disconnect device and make measurements without disconnecting the multimeter De energize the circuit using the installed connect disconnect device 6 Disconnect the test leads from the circuit under test pa n WARNING The maximum common mode voltage voltage between INPUT LO and the chassis ground is 500V peak Exceeding this value may cause a breakdown in insulation creating a shock hazard 2 12 Basic Measurements Power on defaults Power on defaul
239. re FRTD sensor TYPE lt name gt Select FRTD sensor type PT100 D100 F100 PT3916 PT100 PT385 USER TYPE Query FRTD sensor type RZERo lt NRf gt Specify RZERo value 0 to 10 000 100 00 RZERo Query RZERo value ALPHa lt NRf gt Specify ALPHa value 0 to 0 01 0 00385 ALPHa Query ALPHa value BETA lt NRf gt Specify BETA value 0 to 1 00 0 11100 BETA Query BETA value DELTa lt NRf gt Specify DELTa value 0 to 5 00 1 50700 DELTa Query DELTa value FREQuency Path to configure frequency THReshold Path to select the threshold voltage range VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Select threshold range 0 to 1010 10 RANGe Query threshold range REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 0 to 1 5e7 0 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF STATe Query state of reference ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 7 DIGits Query resolution PERiod Path to configure period THReshold Path to select the threshold voltage range VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Select threshold range 0 to 1010 10 RANGe Query threshold range REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 0 to 1 0 iSTATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF STATe Query state of reference ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 7 DIGit
240. reading range is 120V 0 297V or from 119 703V to 120 297V AC current calculations are performed in exactly the same manner using the pertinent specifications ranges and input signal values Specifications A 9 Calculating dBm characteristics accuracy As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits for a 13dBm measurement with a reference impedance of 50Q assume an applied signal 0 998815V The relationship between voltage and dBm is as follows 2 V RREF dBm 10 log Tnw From the previous example on calculating DC characteristics accuracy it can be shown that 0 998815V has an uncertainty of 36 96445uV or 0 998778V to 0 998852V using one year specifications of the 1 VDC range Expressing 0 998778V as dBm 2 dBm 10 log 0 298778V 1 302 13 00032dBm I1mW and expressing 0 998852V as dBm 2 dBm 10 log 0 298852 5002 13 00032dBm l1mW Thus the actual reading range is 13dBm 0 00032dBm dBm and dB for other voltage inputs can be calculated in exactly the same manner using pertinent specifications ranges and reference impedances A 10 Specifications Calculating dB characteristics accuracy The relationship between voltage and dB is as follows Vin REF dB 20 log As an example of how to calculate the actual readings limits for dB with a user defined Vpgpr of 10V you must calculate the voltage accuracy and apply it to above equation To calculate a 60dB measurement a
241. rements Introduction This section summarizes front panel operation of the Model 2010 It is organized as follows Front panel summary Includes an illustration and summarizes keys display and connections Rear panel summary Includes an illustration and summarizes connections Power up Describes connecting the instrument to line power the power up sequence the warm up time and default conditions Display Discusses the display format and messages that may appear while using the instrument Measuring voltage Covers DC and AC voltage measurement connections and low level voltage considerations Ratio Details ratio function connections for DC voltages and voltage measurement with the SENSE terminals Measuring current Covers DC and AC current measurement connections and current fuse replacement Measuring resistance Details two and four wire measurement connections shielding considerations dry circuit measurement and offset compensation Measuring frequency and period Covers frequency and period measurement connections Measuring temperature Describes the use of thermocouples and four wire RTDs for temperature measurements Math Covers the mX b percent dBm and dB math functions performed on single readings Measuring continuity Explains setting up and measuring continuity of a circuit Testing diodes Describes testing general purpose and zener diodes Basic Measurements 2 3
242. rence Table 5 6 cont SENSe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter SENSe 1 RESistance Path to configure resistance y NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate line cycles 0 01 to 10 1 y NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate y RANGe Path to configure measurement range y UPPer lt n gt Select range 0 to 120e6 100e6 y UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO Query auto range y REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 0 to 120e6 0 y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe Query state of reference y ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value y DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 8 8 DIGits Query resolution AVERage Path to configure and control filter TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note TCONtrol Query filter type COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter OFF STATe Query state of digital filter OCOMpensated lt b gt Enable or disable Offset compensation OFF y OCOMpensated Query Offset compensation y FRESistance Path to configure four wire resistance y NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate line cycles 0 01 to 10 1 y NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate y RANGe Path to configure measurement range y UPPer
243. ribe signal source Where is the measurement being performed factory controlled laboratory out of doors etc What power line voltage is used Ambient temperature oH Relative humidity Other Any additional information If special modifications have been made by the user please describe Be sure to include your name and phone number on this service form Specifications are subject to change without notice All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments Inc All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies KENT HLEY Keithley Instruments Inc Sales Offices BELGIUM CHINA FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY GREAT BRITAIN INDIA ITALY JAPAN KOREA NETHERLANDS SWEDEN TAIWAN 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 www keithley com Bergensesteenweg 709 B 1600 Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 Yuan Chen Xin Building Room 705 12 Yumin Road Dewai Madian Beijing 100029 8610 8225 1886 Fax 8610 82251892 Halsuantie 2 e 00420 Helsinki Finland 09 53 06 65 60 Fax 09 53 06 65 65 3 all e des Garays 91127 Palaiseau C dex 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26 Landsberger Strasse 65 82110 Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 Unit 2 Commerce Park Brunel Road Theale Berkshire RG7 4AB 0118 92
244. riggers are sent after every channel closure e SCAN Starts a scanning operation of consecutive channels where an output trigger is sent at the end of the scan list e SHIFT HALT Stops stepping or scanning and restores the trigger model to a non scanning mode Measurement Options 3 21 Using the lt and keys The lt q and gt keys can be used to manually scan through channels on the internal scanner card With a scanner card installed in the option slot press the B key to manually increment channels or the lt q key to manually decrement channels The annunciator of the closed channel is lit Hold down either key to manually scan through channels continuously Press OPEN to open all channels Using OPEN and CLOSE keys The OPEN and CLOSE keys control channels on the internal scanner card only The keys allow you to directly e Close a specific channel or channel pair for four wire resistance e Immediately open any internal closed channel or channel pair for four wire resistance With a scanner card installed in the option slot of the Model 2010 the following prompt is displayed when the CLOSE key is pressed CLOSE CHAN 01 Use the lt d gt A and YW keys to display the desired channel 1 to 10 and press ENTER The annunciator of the closed channel will be displayed on the front panel along with normal readings Selecting a different channel from the one that is presently closed will cause the closed ch
245. rmation about the Model 2010 Multimeter The information is organized as follows Feature overview Warranty information Manual addenda Safety symbols and terms Specifications Inspection Options and accessories If you have any questions after reviewing this information please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Applications Engineers at 1 800 348 3735 U S and Canada only Worldwide phone numbers are listed at the front of this manual Feature overview The Model 2010 is a 7 2 digit high performance digital multimeter It has 0 0018 90 day basic DC voltage accuracy and 0 0032 90 day basic resistance accuracy At 6 digits the multimeter delivers 50 triggered readings sec over the IEEE 488 bus At 41 digits it can read up to 2000 readings sec into its internal buffer The Model 2010 has broad measurement ranges DC voltage from 10nV to 1000V AC RMS voltage from 0 1uV to 750V 1000V peak DC current from 10nA to 3A AC RMS current from 1uA to 3A Two and four wire resistance from 1uQ to 120M Frequency from 3Hz to 500kHz Thermocouple temperature from 200 C to 1372 C RTD temperature from 200 C to 630 C Some additional capabilities of the Model 2010 are Full range of functions In addition to those listed above the Model 2010 functions include period dB dBm continuity diode testing mX b and percent Optional scanning For internal scanning options include the Model 20
246. rn the last instrument reading y DATA FRESh Returns a new fresh reading y HOLD Path to control Hold feature WINDow lt NRf gt Set Hold window 0 01 to 20 1 WINDow Query Hold window COUNt lt NRf gt Set Hold count 2 to 100 5 COUNt Query Hold count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Hold OFF STATe Query state of Hold CURRent AC Path to configure AC current y NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate line cycles 0 01 to 10 1 y NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate y RANGe Path to configure measurement range y UPPer lt n gt Select range 0 to 3 1 3 y UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO Query auto range y REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 3 1 to 3 1 0 V STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe Query state of reference y ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value y DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 6 DIGits Query resolution AVERage Path to configure and control the filter TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note TCONtrol Query filter type COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 COUNt Query filter count 10 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter OFF STATe Query state of digital filter DETector Path to configure bandwidth BANDwidth lt NRf gt Specify bandwidth 3 to 300e3 30 BANDwidth Query band
247. rrent and voltage to the card Before operating an instrument make sure the line cord is connected to a properly grounded power receptacle Inspect the connecting cables test leads and jumpers for possible wear cracks or breaks before each use When installing equipment where access to the main power cord is restricted such as rack mounting a separate main input power disconnect device must be provided in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator 5 03 For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instruments while power is applied to the circuit under test ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system and discharge any capacitors before connecting or disconnecting cables or jumpers installing or removing switching cards or making internal changes such as installing or removing jumpers Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth ground Always make measurements with dry hands while standing on a dry insulated surface capable of withstanding the voltage being measured The instrument and accessories must be used in accordance with its specifications and operating instructions or the safety of the equipment may be impaired Do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories as defined in the specifications and operating information and as shown on the instrument or test fixt
248. s COUNt lt n gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 COUNt lt n gt Set measure count Parameters lt n gt 1 to 9999 Specify count INF Sets count to infinite DEFault Sets count to 1 MINimum Sets count to 1 MAXimum Sets count to 9999 Query COUNt Queries programmed count COUNt DEFault Queries RST default count COUNt MINimum Queries lowest allowable count COUNt MAXimum Queries highest allowable count Description This command is used to specify how many times operation loops around in the trigger operation For example if the count is set to ten operation continues to loop around until ten device actions are performed After the tenth action operation proceeds back up to the start of the trigger model Note that each loop places operation at the control source where it waits for the programmed event DELay lt n gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 DELay lt n gt Set trigger model delay Parameters lt n gt 0 to 999999 999 Specify delay in seconds DEFault 0 second delay MINimum 0 second delay MAXimum 999999 999 second delay Query DELay Query the programmed delay DELay DEFault Query the RST default delay DELay MINimum Query the lowest allowable delay DELay MAXimum Query the highest allowable delay Description The delay is used to delay operation of the trigger model After the programmed event occurs the instrument waits until the delay period expires before performing the Device Action in the Trigger Model The delay time can also be se
249. s Five bus management lines and three handshake lines round out the complement of bus signal lines A typical setup for controlled operation is shown in Figure E 1 Generally a system will con tain one controller and a number of other instruments to which the commands are given Device operation is categorized into three operators controller talker and listener The controller con trols the instruments on the bus The talker sends data while a listener receives data Depending on the type of instrument any particular device can be a talker only a listener only or both a talker and listener IEEE 488 Bus Overview E 3 Figure E 1 TO OTHER DEVICES IEEE 488 bus configuration DEVICE 1 ABLE TO 9 TALK LISTEN 2 AND CONTROL 4 COMPUTER d DATA BUS DEVICE 2 ABLE TO TALK AND LISTEN 7001 DATA BYTE TRANSFER E CONTROL DEVICE 3 ONLY ABLE 4 TOLISTEN H PRINTER 4 GENERAL rl INTERFACE N MANAGEMENT DEVICE4 C5 ONLY ABLE TOTALK F4 L D101 8 DATA 8 LINES DAV NRFD gt HANDSHAKE NDAC IFC ATN SRQ BUS REN MANAGEMENT EOI There are two categories of controllers system controller and basic controller Both are able to control other instruments but only the system controller has the absolute authority in the system In a system with more than one controller only one controller may be active at any given time Certain protocol is used to pass control fr
250. s Query resolution DIODe Paths to configure diode test CURRent RANGe Path to select range UPPer lt NRf gt Select range 0 to le 3 le 3 UPPer Query range SCPI Command Reference 5 17 Table 5 6 cont SENSe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter SENSe 1 CONTinuity Path to configure continuity test THReshold lt NRf gt Set threshold resistance 1 to 1000 10 THReshold Query threshold resistance Note REPeat is the RST default and MOVing is the S YSTem PRESet default Table 5 7 STATus command summary ook Default Command Description parameter SCPI STATus Note 1 y MEASurement Path to control measurement event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 ENABle Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register OPERation Path to control operation status registers y EVENt Read the event register Note 2 y ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 y ENABle Read the enable register V CONDition Read the condition register y QUEStionable Path to control questionable status registers y EVENt Read the event register Note 2 y ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 y ENABIle Read the enable register V CONDition Read the condition register y PRESet Return status registers to default states y
251. s Meas A Reading Available RAV RAV RAV gt Triggering Trig Trig Trig gt 6 6 6 6 6 6 Logical Logical Buffer Available BAV BAV BAV OR 7 7_ _7 1 ER Buffer Half Full BHF BHF O BHF 8 8 8 A Buffer Full BFL BFL BFL 9 9 9 gt 10 10 10 Idle Idle ide _Idle ti u u gt 1 1 11 S 12 12 12 A 12 12 12 gt 13 13 13 13 13 _13 gt 14 14 14 14 14 14 Always Zero 15 15 15 Always Zero T5 15 15 L Remote Operation 4 17 Condition registers As Figure 4 5 shows all status register sets have a condition register A condition register is a real time read only register that constantly updates to reflect the present operating conditions of the instrument For example while a measurement is being performed bit B4 Meas of the Operation Condition Register is set When the measurement is completed bit B4 clears Use the CONDition query commands in the STATus Subsystem to read the condition registers See Section 5 for more information Event registers As Figure 4 5 shows each status register set has an event register An event register is a latched read only register whose bits are set by the corresponding condition register Once a bit in an event register is set it remains set latched until the register is cleared by a specific clearing operation The bits of an event register are logically ANDed with the bits of the corresponding
252. s not used Thus the NPLC setting is only valid for bandwidth setting of 300 SCPI Command Reference 5 49 THReshold commands Use these commands to set the maximum range input signal level for frequency and period measurements RANGe lt n gt SENSe 1 PERiod THReshold VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Set voltage threshold range SENSe 1 FREQuency THReshold VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Set voltage threshold range Parameters lt n gt Oto 1010 Specify signal level in volts voltage threshold Query RANGe Query maximum signal level Description These commands are used to specify the expected input level The instrument will then automatically select the most sensitive current or voltage threshold range TRANsducer commands TRANsducer lt name gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature TRANsducer lt name gt Select sensor type Parameters lt name gt FRTD Set sensor type to four wire RTD TCouple Set sensor type to thermocouple Query TRANsducer Query type of temperature sensor Description This command is used to specify the type of sensor desired for temperature measurements Specify TCouple if you are using a thermocouple The TCouple TYPE command is then used to specify which type of thermocouple you wish to use Specify FRTD if you are using a four wire RTD sensor The FRTD TYPE command is then used to specify a particular four wire RTD sensor type 5 50 SCPI Command Reference Thermocouple commands TYPE lt name gt SENSe 1
253. s presume QuickBASIC version 4 5 or higher and a CEC IEEE 488 interface card with CEC driver version 2 11 or higher with the Model 2010 at address 16 on the IEEE 488 bus Changing function and range The Model 2010 has independent controls for each of its measurement functions This means for example that autorange can be turned on for DC voltage while leaving it off for AC voltage Another difference is in the parameter to the range command In other instruments a single number was used to denote each range The parameter of the SCPI RANGe command is given as the maximum value to measure The instrument interprets this parameter and goes to the appropriate range When you query the range with RANGe the instrument sends back the full scale value of its present range The following example program illustrates changing function and range It sets the range for several functions and then takes readings on each of those functions Note that the Model 2010 rounds the range parameter to an integer before choosing the appropriate range Sending VOLTage DC RANGe 20 45 will set the Model 2010 to the 100V range Example Programs Example program to demonstrate changing function and range taking readings on various functions For QuickBASIC 4 5 and CEC PC488 interface card Edit the following line to where the QuickBASIC libraries are on your computer SINCLUDE c qb45 ieeeqb bi Initialize the CEC interface as address 21
254. scanner card installed manually scans channels Opens all channels on internal scanner card stops scanning Closes selected internal channel Steps through channels sends a trigger after each channel Scans through channels sends a trigger after last channel Changes number of digits of resolution Changes reading rate fast medium slow Cancels selection moves back to measurement display Accepts selection moves to next choice or back to measurement display Used to access shifted keys Cancels GPIB remote mode 2 4 Basic Measurements 3 Shifted operation keys mX B dBm dB CONT tr SENSOR PERCENT PERIOD LOCAL DELAY HOLD LIMITS ON OFF TYPE RATIO DRY CKT O COMP SAVE SETUP CONFIG HALT GPIB RS232 TEST CAL 4 Range keys A v AUTO Manipulates normal display readings X using the equation Y mX b Converts a value to the decibels above or below a 1mW reference Compresses a large range of DC or AC voltage measurements into a much smaller scope Measures circuit continuity on the 1kQ range Measures the forward voltage drop of general purpose diodes the zener voltage of zener diodes and the test current range from the front panel Chooses temperature sensor thermocouple or four wire RTD Selects the percentage calculations and lets you specify a reference value Makes period measurements from 2us to 333ms on voltage ranges of 100mV 1V 10V 100V and 750V Brings into remote mode for
255. sing the Model 2010 to talk a decimal value is sent to the computer The binary equivalent of this value determines which bits in the appropriate register are set The event registers are shown in Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 andFigure 5 6 Note that reading an event register clears the bits in that register For example assume that reading the Measurement Event Register results in an acquired decimal value of 544 The binary equivalent is 0000001000100000 For this binary value bits B5 and B9 of the Measurement Event Register are set Figure 5 4 Measurement event register Bit Position Event Decimal Weighting Value Measurement Event Register Bit BO Reading Overflow ROF Set bit indicates that the reading exceeds the measurement range of the instrument SCPI Command Reference 5 55 Bit B1 Low Limit1 LL1 Set bit indicates that the reading is less than the Low Limit 1 setting Bit B2 High Limit1 HL1 Set bit indicates that the reading is greater than the High Limit 1 setting Bit B3 Low Limit 2 LL2 Set bit indicates that the reading is less than the Low Limit 2 setting Bit B4 High Limit 2 HL2 Set bit indicates that the reading is greater than the High Limit 2 setting Bit B5 Reading Available RAV Set bit indicates that a reading was taken and processed Bit B6 Not used Bit B7 Buffer Available BAV Set bit indicates that there are at least two readings in the trac
256. sing the adapter cable With this adapter a Model 706 could be substituted for the Model 7001 7002 in the previous example With the Model 706 set for External Triggering the test would start when the single scan mode is selected and initiated If the Model 2010 trigger line configuration has been changed from the factory setting the Model 8502 Trigger Link Adapter must be used to interface with instruments having BNC trigger connections It has two micro DIN connectors and six BNC connectors one for each trigger line Figure 3 9 Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable DIN to BNC trigger cable 1 i O l i Channel Ready External f Trigger E BB T T 1o cine o E prae 706 Scanner 2010 Multimeter 3 16 Measurement Options Buffer operations The Model 2010 has a buffer to store from two to 1024 readings and units It also stores the channel number for scanned readings and overflow readings In addition recalled data includes statistical information such as minimum maximum average and standard deviation NOTE Statistics are not calculated when an overflow reading has been stored in the buffer The buffer fills with the requested number of readings and stops Readings are placed in the buffer after any math operations are performed Buffered data
257. sis dase aber eee 4 17 Fable registers sopiris seiere ini ar ei 4 17 QUEUES aa E ee 4 20 Status Byte and Service Request SRQ sssesseesessesseessess 4 21 Trigger model GPIB operation 20 0 ee ee eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 4 24 Idle ANG initiate a seis cease fasts eestencadadaduecseshnesusesssaadesageseessenayeds 4 25 Trigger model Operation 0 eee eee eeeceeeseeeeeteeeeaeeeeeeaees 4 25 Programming SYNLAXK scsecsscssseseceasvanesvesscdbanseveastssasaacssonssreasecansent 4 27 Command Words 2 ssccccesescceesisensscessdeestseeessveatesesestbasees 4 27 QUELY COMMANS oi ccsssisccsssesesssaiedoceessioesebeesenisesageecsstanaveee 4 29 Case Sensitivity sercami ene sents e sede aiK 4 29 Long form and short form versions essseeseerreeerrereeeee 4 29 Short form rules siessosriiirieyi tius iair 4 30 Program MESSAGES acassccccsseessdessseressecesiaeestesesdnadsoageesnstenasees 4 30 Response MESSAGES cceseetceessssessessevesestesseseeertenereoasees 4 33 Message exchange protocol 0 0 eeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaees 4 33 Common Commands 000 eeeeseeseeeeeseceeeeseeecesaeceeecsesseeeaeeneeeaes 4 34 CLS Clear Status ccccccssssssesessecsssresssssseseseessens 4 34 ESE lt NRf gt Event Enable oe ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 35 ESE Event Enable Query eee eeeeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 35 ESR Event Status Register Query eee 4 36 IDN Identification Query ote eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 4 38 OPC Opera
258. sked bit in the event register sets the summary bit of the next register set in the status structure will set The decimal weighting of the bits for each event enable register are included in Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 and Figure 5 9 The sum of the decimal weights of the bits that you wish to set is sent as the parameter lt NRf gt for the appropriate ENABle command For example to set the BFL and RAV bits of the Measurement Event Enable Register send the following command stat meas enab 544 where BFL bit B9 Decimal RAV bit B5 Decimal lt NRf gt 512 32 544 Figure 5 7 Measurement event Bit Position enable register Event Decimal Weighting Value SCPI Command Reference Figure 5 8 Questionable event enable register Figure 5 9 Operation event enable register B15 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO BFL BHF BAV RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF _ Sta 256 128 32 16 8 4 2 1 29 28 27 25 24 23 24 21 29 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Value 1 Enable Measurement Event Events BFL Buffer Full 0 Disable Mask Measurement Event BHF Buffer Half Full BAV Buffer Available RAV Reading Available HL2 High Limit 2 LL2 Low Limit 2 HL1 High Limit 1 LL1 Low Limit 1 ROF Reading Overflow Bit Position B15 B14 B13
259. ss SHIFT and then 2 Use the A and keys to scroll through the three test current selections The diode test measures voltages up to 10V for the 1mA test current 5V for 100uA and 10V for the 10pA range If a reading is more than 10V the Model 2010 displays the OVERFLOW status message 2 38 Basic Measurements Measurement Options 3 2 Measurement Options Introduction This section describes the front panel features of the Model 2010 For those measurement options accessible only by a remote interface refer to Sections 4 and 5 This section is organized as follows e Measurement configuration Describes ranging filtering relative readings digits of resolution and measurement rate e Trigger operations Uses a trigger model to explain trigger modes and sources Buffer operations Discusses the reading storage buffer and buffer statistics e Limit operations Defines how to set reading limits Scan operations Explains the internal and external scanning capabilities e System operations Gives details on setup saving and restoring selecting a remote interface and accessing test and calibration Measurement configuration The following paragraphs discuss configuring the multimeter for making measurements See the end of Appendix A for information about optimizing readings for speed or accuracy Range The selected measurement range affects both the ultimate digits and accuracy of the
260. ssume 10mVRMS for a Vggr of 10V Using the 100mV range one year 10Hz 20kHz frequency band and SLOW rate the voltage limits are Accuracy 0 06 of reading 0 03 of range 0 006 x 10mV 0 0003 x 100mV 6uV 30uV 36uV Thus the actual reading accuracy is 10mV 36uV or 10 036mV to 9 964mV Applying the voltage reading accuracy into the dB equation yields 7 10 036mV __ dBm 20 log ioy 59 96879dB 2 9 964mV _ dBm 20 log y 60 031334B Thus the actual reading accuracy is 60dB 0 031213dB to 60dB 0 031326dB dBm and dB for other voltage inputs can be calculated in exactly the same manner using pertinent specifications ranges and other reference voltages Additional derating factors In some cases additional derating factors must be applied to calculate certain accuracy values For example an additional derating factor must be added for DC voltages over 500V Before calculating accuracy study the associated specification notes carefully to see if any derating factors apply Specifications A 11 Optimizing measurement accuracy The configurations listed below assume that the multimeter has had factory setups restored DC voltage DC current and resistance e Select 6 digits 10 PLC filter ON up to 100 readings fixed range e Use REL on DC voltage and two wire resistance measurements e Use four wire resistance measurements for best accuracy AC voltage and AC current e
261. st ENABle will contain all the enabled messages Messages are specified by numbers see Appendix B The following examples show various forms for expressing a message numlist Numlist 110 Single message 110 140 222 Messages separated by commas 110 222 Range of messages 110 through 222 110 222 230 Range entry and single entry separated by a comma NOTE To disable all messages from entering the Error Queue send the following command stat que enab SCPI Command Reference 5 63 DISable lt list gt STATus QUEue DISable lt list gt Disable messages for Error Queue Parameter lt list gt numlist where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to disable for the Error Queue Query DISable Query list of disabled messages Description On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want disabled Disabled messages are prevented from going into the Error Queue Messages are specified by numbers see Appendix B See QUEue ENABle for examples to express a numlist CLEar STATus QUEue CLEar Clears all messages from Error Queue Description This command is used to clear the Error Queue of all messages 5 64 SCPI Command Reference SYSTem subsystem The SYSTem subsystem contains miscellaneous commands that are summarize
262. state of math function y IMMediate Recalculate raw input data in buffer y IMMediate Perform calculation and read result y DATA Read math result of CALC 2 V CALCulate3 Subsystem to control CALC 3 limit test y LIMit 1 Path to control LIMIT 1 test y UPPer Path to configure upper limit y DATA lt n gt Set upper limit 100e6 to 100e6 1 y DATA Query upper limit V LOWer Path to configure lower limit y DATA lt n gt Set lower limit 100e6 to 100e6 1 y DATA Query lower limit y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable limit test OFF y STATe Query state of limit test V FAIL Query test result 1 fail 0 pass V CLEar Path to clear failed test V IMMediate Clear failed test indication y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear ON y AUTO Query auto clear V IMMediate Re perform limit tests y 5 8 SCPI Command Reference Table 5 2 cont CALCulate command summary Command Description Detault SCPI parameter LIMit 2 Path to control LIMIT 2 test V UPPer Path to configure upper limit y DATA lt n gt Set upper limit 100e6 to 100e6 2 y DATA Query upper limit y LOWer Path to configure lower limit V DATA lt n gt Set lower limit 100e6 to 100e6 2 y DATA Query lower limit y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable limit test OFF y STATe Query state of limit test y FAIL Query test result 1 pass 0 fail y CL
263. t command 5 54 FEED command 5 72 FORMat subsystem 5 28 FREE command 5 71 FUNCtion Command 5 37 HOLD Command 5 39 INITiate commands 5 73 KCLick command 5 64 KEY command 5 68 OCOMpensated command 5 45 POINts command 5 71 POSetup lt name gt command 5 65 PRESet command 5 60 5 64 QUEue commands 5 61 RANGe commands 5 41 REFerence lt n gt commands 5 43 SCAN commands 5 35 SYSTem subsystem 5 64 TEMPerature command 5 76 THReshold commands 5 49 TRACe subsystem 5 71 TRANsducer commands 5 49 TRIGger commands 5 74 UNIT subsystem 5 76 VERSion command 5 65 VOLTage commands 5 77 Symbols CLS Clear Status 4 34 ESE Event Enable 4 35 ESE Event Enable Query 4 35 ESR Event Status Register Query 4 36 IDN Identification Query 4 38 OPC Operation Complete 4 38 OPC Operation Complete Query 4 40 OPT Option Identification Query 4 41 RCL Recall 4 41 RST RESET 4 42 SAV Save 4 42 SRE Service Request Enable 4 42 SRE Service Request Enable Query 4 42 STB Status Byte Query 4 44 TRG Trigger 4 45 TST Self Test Query 4 45 WAI Wait to Continue 4 46 About program fragments 4 11 AC voltage and AC current A 11 AC voltage offset 2 19 Accuracy calculations A 8 Additional derating factors A 10 Address commands E 8 Addressed multiline commands E 8 AMPS fuse replacement 2 23 Autoranging 3 3 Bandwidth 3 7 Bandwidth command
264. t 2 2 Low limit 2 1 mX b Off Scale factor 1 0 Offset 0 0 2 13 2 14 Basic Measurements Table 2 2 cont Factory defaults Setting Factory default Percent Off Reference 1 0 Resistance two wire and four wire Digits T2 Filter On Count 10 Mode Moving average Range Auto Relative Off Value 0 0 Rate Medium 1 PLC Dry circuit Offset compensation RS 232 Baud Flow Tx term Scanning Channels Mode Temperature Digits Filter Count Mode Junction Temperature Relative Value Rate Sensor Thermocouple Four wire RTD Units Triggers Continuous Delay Source Off Off Off No effect No effect No effect Off 1 10 Internal 5 On 10 Moving average Simulated 23 C Off 0 0 Medium 1 PLC Thermocouple J PT100 C On Auto Immediate Table 2 2 cont Basic Measurements Factory defaults Setting Factory default Voltage AC and DC dB reference No effect dBm reference 75Q Digits AC 52 Digits DC Ti Filter On Count 10 Mode Moving average Range Auto Relative Off Value 0 0 Rate AC Medium Rate DC Medium 1 PLC Ratio DC Off Sensein Off DETector BANDwidth 30 GPIB primary address 2 15 The GPIB primary address of the instrument must be the same as the primary address you specify in the controller s programming language The default primary address of the instrument is 16 but you can set the address to any value fr
265. t by using the AUTO parameter If AUTO is set to 1 or on the delay period is enabled and will occur If AUTO is set to 0 or off the delay period is not enabled and no delay will occur SCPI Command Reference 5 75 SOURce lt name gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 SOURce lt name gt Specify measure event control source Parameters lt name gt IMMediate Pass operation through immediately EXTernal Select External Triggering as event TIMer Select timer as event MANual Select manual event BUS Select bus trigger as event Query SOURce Query programmed control source Description These commands are used to select the event control source With IMMediate selected operation immediately starts A specific event can be used to control operation With EXTernal selected operation continues when an External Trigger is received With TIMer selected the event occurs at the beginning of the timer interval and each time it times out For example if the timer is programmed for a 30 second interval the first pass through the control source occurs immediately Subsequent scan events will then occur every 30 seconds The interval for the timer is set using the TIMer command With MANual selected the event occurs when the TRIG key is pressed With BUS selected the event occurs when a GET or TRG command is sent over the bus TIMer lt n gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 TIMer lt n gt Set interval for measure layer timer Parameters lt n gt 0 001
266. t signal as reference REFerence Query reference value DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 6 DIGits Query resolution AVERage Path to configure and control the filter TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note TCONtrol Query filter type COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter OFF STATe Query state of digital filter TRANsducer lt name gt Select transducer type FRTD or TCouple TCouple TRANsducer Query transducer type TCouple Path to configure thermocouple TYPE lt name gt Select thermocouple type J K T or N J TYPE Query thermocouple type RJUNCction 1 Path to configure reference junction RSELect lt name gt Select reference type SIMulated or REAL SIMulated RSELect Query reference type SIMulated lt n gt Specify simulated temperature in C 0 to 50 23 C SIMulated Query simulated temperature REAL Path to configure real reference junction TCOefficient lt n gt Specify temp coefficient 0 09999 to 0 09999 2e 4 TCOefficient Query temp coefficient OFFSET lt n gt Specify voltage offset at 0 C 0 09999 to 0 09999 5 463e 2 OFFSet Query voltage offset 5 16 Table 5 6 cont SENSe command summary SCPI Command Reference Command Description Default SCPI parameter SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD Path to configu
267. t temperatures to minimize these thermal EMFs A shielded enclosure around the circuit under test also helps by minimizing air currents The REL control can be used to null out constant offset voltages NOTE Additional thermals may be generated by the optional scanner cards Basic Measurements 2 19 AC voltage offset The Model 2010 at 5 digits resolution will typically display 100 counts of offset on AC volts with the input shorted This offset is caused by the offset of the TRMS converter This offset will not affect reading accuracy and should not be zeroed out using the REL feature The follow ing equation expresses how this offset Vopfsgr is added to the signal input Vm Displayed reading lo Wines Example Range 1VAC Offset 100 counts 1 0mV Input 100mV RMS Displayed reading toon 1 0mV dooi 1x10fV us Il Displayed reading 0 100005 The offset is seen as the last digit which is not displayed Therefore the offset is negligible If the REL feature were used to zero the display the 100 counts of offset would be subtracted from Vy resulting in an error of 100 counts in the displayed reading See Section 3 for information on the configuration options for DC and AC voltage measurements 2 20 Basic Measurements Ratio The Model 2010 can perform a quotient calculation between the sense input denominator and the measure input numerator This calculation can only be perf
268. t to the 8 x 10 V Hz product Trigger level Frequency and Period use a zero crossing trigger which means a count is taken when the frequency crosses the zero level The Model 2010 uses a reciprocal counting technique to measure frequency and period This method generates constant measurement resolution for any input frequency The multimeter s AC voltage measurement section performs input signal conditioning Gate time The gate time is the amount of time the Model 2010 uses to sample frequency or period readings All settings of the RATE key FAST MEDium SLOW yield a gate time of one second The Model 2010 completes a reading when it receives its first zero crossing after the gate time expires In other words the reading is completed 1 2 cycle after the gate time has expired For example with a 1 second gate time to sample a 3Hz frequency you may wait up to 3 seconds before the Model 2010 returns a reading Basic Measurements 2 29 Connections Assuming factory default conditions the basic procedure is 1 Connect test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals of the Model 2010 Either the front or rear inputs can be used place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position 2 Select the FREQ or PERIOD function 3 Connect test leads to the source as shown in Figure 2 8 CAUTION Do not exceed 1000V peak between INPUT HI and INPUT LO or instrument damage may occur 4 Take a reading from the display See Section 3 f
269. ten on TAG SR1 Service Request capability RL1 Remote Local capability PPO No Parallel Poll capability DC1 Device Clear capability DT1 Device Trigger capability CO No Controller capability El Open collector bus drivers TEO No Extended Talker capability LEO No Extended Listener capability The codes define Model 2010 capabilities as follows SH Source Handshake Function SH1 defines the ability of the instrument to initiate the transfer of message data over the data bus AH Acceptor Handshake Function AH1 defines the ability of the instrument to guarantee proper reception of message data transmitted over the data bus T Talker Function The ability of the instrument to send data over the bus to other devices is provided by the T function Instrument talker capabilities T5 exist only after the instrument has been addressed to talk L Listener Function The ability for the instrument to receive device dependent data over the bus from other devices is provided by the L function Listener capabilities L4 of the instrument exist only after it has been addressed to listen SR Service Request Function SR1 defines the ability of the instrument to request service from the controller RL Remote Local Function RL1 defines the ability of the instrument to be placed in the remote or local modes E 14 IEEE 488 Bus Overview PP Parallel Poll Function The instrument does not have parall
270. ter 1 Set MSB bit Bit 0 4 Set EAV bit Bit 2 8 Set QSB bit Bit 3 16 Set MAV bit Bit 4 32 Set ESB Bit 5 128 Set OSB Bit 7 255 Set all bits Description Use the SRE command to program the Service Request Enable Register Send this command with the decimal equivalent of the binary value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the register This register is cleared on power up This enable register is used along with the Status Byte Register to generate service requests SRQ With a bit in the Service Request Enable Register set an SRQ occurs when the Remote Operation 4 43 corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register is set by an appropriate event For more information on register structure see the information presented earlier in this section The Service Request Enable Register is shown in Figure 4 15 Notice that the decimal weight of each bit is included in the illustration The sum of the decimal weights of the bits that you wish to set is the value that is sent with the SRE command For example to set the ESB and MAV bits of the Service Request Enable Register send the following command SRE 48 Where ESB bit B5 Decimal 32 MAV bit B4 Decimal 16 lt NRf gt 48 The contents of the Service Request Enable Register can be read using the SRE query command Figure 4 15 Service request enable Bit Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO register Event OSB
271. ter the settling time of each measurement Figure 3 5 Meter Trigger link output Complete pulse specifications VMC TTL High 3 4V Typical TTL Low 0 25V Typical lt 10us Minimum External triggering example In a typical test system you may want to close a channel and then measure the DUT connected to the channel with a multimeter Such a test system is shown in Figure 3 6 which uses a Model 2010 to measure ten DUTs switched by a Model 7011 multiplexer card in a Model 7001 7002 Switch System Measurement Options 3 13 Figure 3 6 7 DUT test system B t ofo o t 1 1 ee OUTPUT DUT E oTo 7 i 2 ait 2010 Multimeter DUT To oTo 10 a a l Card 1 7011 MUX Card The Trigger Link connections for this test system are shown in Figure 3 7 Trigger Link of the Model 2010 is connected to Trigger Link either IN or OUT of the Model 7001 7002 Note that with the default trigger settings on the Model 7001 7002 line 1 is an input and line 2 is an output This complements the trigger lines on the Model 2010 Figure 3 7 7001 or 7002 Switch System 2010 Multimeter Trigger link TST connections Trigger wo Trigger pe Link Link Trigger Link Cable 8501 For this example the Model 2010 and 7001 7002 are configured as follows Model 2010 Factory defaults restored accessed
272. th BNC connections 3 15 Feature overview 1 2 FETCh command 5 3 Filter 3 3 Filter types 3 4 Front panel GPIB operation 4 15 Front panel scanner controls 3 20 Front panel summary 2 3 FRTD commands 5 52 Gate time 2 28 General Bus Commands 4 12 General Bus Commands and Associated Statements 4 12 General Information 1 1 General purpose probes 1 4 Generating SRQ on buffer full C 5 GET group execute trigger 4 14 GPIB bus 4 3 GPIB bus connections 4 8 GPIB bus operation and reference 4 8 GPIB bus standards 4 8 GPIB primary address 2 15 GPIB status indicators 4 15 GTL go to local 4 13 Handshake lines E 5 High energy circuit safety precautions 2 11 Hold example 3 11 Idle 3 8 Idle and initiate 4 25 IEEE command groups E 12 TEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information F 1 TEEE 488 Bus Overview E 1 IFC interface clear 4 12 Inspection 1 4 Install the universal language driver 4 10 Interface function codes E 13 Introduction 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 4 8 E 2 F 2 Keithley Models 196 199 Digital Multimeter 4 4 Limit operations 3 18 Line frequency query 5 70 Line power connection 2 8 LLO local lockout 4 13 LOCAL key 4 15 Long form and short form versions 4 29 Low level considerations 2 17 Low resistance measurements 2 25 Low thermal probes 1 5 Manual addenda 1 3 Manual ranging 3 2 Math 2 32 Maximum readings 3 2 MEASure command 5 5 Measurement configuration 3 2 Measurement Options 3 1
273. the corresponding cleared bit in the Service Request Enable Register The logic 1 output of the AND gate is applied to the input of the OR gate and thus sets the MSS RQS bit in the Status Byte Register The individual bits of the Service Request Enable Register can be set or cleared by using the SRE lt NRf gt common command To read the Service Request Enable Register use the SRE query command The Service Request Enable Register clears when power is cycled or a parameter n value of zero is sent with the SRE command SRE 0 Remote Operation 4 23 Serial poll and SRQ Any enabled event summary bit that goes from 0 to 1 will set RQS and generate a service request SRQ In your test program you can periodically read the Status Byte Register to check if a service request SRQ has occurred and what caused it If an SRQ occurs the program can for example branch to an appropriate subroutine that will service the request Typically service requests SRQs are managed by the serial poll sequence of the Model 2010 If an SRQ does not occur bit B6 RQS of the Status Byte Register will remain cleared and the program will simply proceed normally after the serial poll is performed If an SRQ does occur bit B6 of the Status Byte Register will set and the program can branch to a service subroutine when the SRQ is detected by the serial poll The serial poll automatically resets RQS of the Status Byte Register This allows subsequ
274. ti byte data transfer sequence SRQ Service Request The SRQ line is used by devices when they require service from the controller IEEE 488 Bus Overview E 5 Handshake lines Figure E 2 The bus handshake lines operate in an interlocked sequence This method ensures reliable data transmission regardless of the transfer rate Generally data transfer will occur at a rate determined by the slowest active device on the bus One of the three handshake lines is controlled by the source the talker sending information while the remaining two lines are controlled by accepting devices the listener or listeners receiving the information The three handshake lines are DAV DATA VALID The source controls the state of the DAV line to indicate to any listening devices whether or not data bus information is valid NRED Not Ready For Data The acceptor controls the state of NRFD It is used to signal to the transmitting device to hold off the byte transfer sequence until the accepting device is ready NDAC Not Data Accepted NDAC is also controlled by the accepting device The state of NDAC tells the source whether or not the device has accepted the data byte The complete handshake sequence for one data byte is shown in Figure E 2 Once data is placed on the data lines the source checks to see that NRFD is high indicating that all active devices are ready At the same time NDAC should be low from the previous byte trans
275. tion Complete 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 38 OPC Operation Complete Query eee eee 4 40 OPT Option Identification Query eee 4 41 RCL Recall esistini ecirar ayie 4 41 RST RESET piniienn i 4 42 SAV SAVE iiaae aE a ai 4 42 SRE lt NRf gt Service Request Enable ee 4 42 SRE Service Request Enable Query ee 4 42 STB Status Byte Query oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeees 4 44 ITRG PIS SOL sesionin iroa ani reia a a 4 45 TST Self Test Query sirisser aani 4 45 WAI Wait to Continue sseseseseeeeeeeseererreresreresreresreeee 4 46 5 SCPI Command Reference SCPI signal oriented measurement commands cece 5 2 CONFigure Command 0 00 eeeeseeeeseeseceseeeeeeaeeseseeeeaeeaes 5 2 FETCh command acieirar 5 3 READ command sensisset 5 4 MEA S re commandi s irsssrenonniernnani arna 5 5 SCPI command subsystems reference tables nosses 5 6 Calculate SUDSYStEM ocsam a 5 20 ICAL Culate crer Melis RRE 5 20 CAL CUlated an EEE 5 22 SCAT Cul E a a EAE 5 24 DISPlay SUbDSYStemM sorrisi 5 26 FOR Mat subsystem lt cescssecesteseseissessaionaesdocatenssepacernesvenagbaacass 5 28 DATA command secetei aeoaea E AAE 5 28 BORDer command n ssossesesessesseeeeseeessesrsrerserersreesssenssres 5 30 ELEMents command sssesoseeeesesssseseseesssesssrereseersseesssesssres 5 31 ROU Te s bsy stei fs ccscsesiissciastsaetevenssesssuaessoasscansessasersanedeadvenaae 5 32
276. tion This action command is used to clear the fail indication of the LIMIT1 or LIMIT test Note that a failure is also cleared when the limit test is disabled STATe OFF AUTO lt b gt CALCulate3 LIMit 1 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto clear CALCulate3 LIMit2 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto clear Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable auto clear for limit failure 0 or OFF Disable auto clear for limit failure Query AUTO Query state of auto clear Description With auto clear enabled the fail indication of a limit test clears when instrument operation enters the idle state With auto clear disabled the fail indication will remain until it is cleared by the CLEar MMediate command 5 26 SCPI Command Reference IMMediate CALCulate3 IMMediate Perform CALC3 Description When the configuration of the limit test is changed the next reading is evaluated according to the new test configuration If the instrument is not in a continuous measurement mode e g waiting for a manual trigger the test will not be performed until the next reading conversion occurs This action command lets you re process the current input data to test new limits For example assume the instrument is in a non continuous measurement mode and requires a manual trigger to cause the next reading conversion Changing the test limits will not affect the last test result However sending the MMediate command reprocesses the data and evaluates the read
277. tion data lost EE 514 DC calibration data lost EE 515 Calibration dates lost EE 522 GPIB communication language lost EE 610 Questionable Calibration SE 611 Questionable Temperature SE B 5 B 6 Status and Error Messages Table B 1 cont Status and error messages Number Description Event 800 RS 232 Framing Error detected EE 802 RS 232 Overrun detected EE 803 RS 232 Break detected EE 805 Invalid system communication EE 806 RS 232 Settings Lost EE 807 RS 232 OFLO Characters Lost EE 808 ASCII only with RS 232 EE 900 Internal System Error EE DDC Status Model 950 DDC Trigger Overrun Error EE 951 DDC Interval Overrun Error EE 952 DDC Big String Error EE 953 DDC Uncalibrated Error EE 954 DDC No Scanner Error EE 955 DDC Maximum Channel is 4 EE 956 DDC Maximum Channel is 8 EE 957 DDC Calibration Locked EE 958 DDC Conflict Error EE 959 DDC No Remote Error EE 960 DDC Mode IDDC Error EE 961 DDC Mode IDDCO Error EE Keithley 199 Serial Poll Byte Events 962 DDC Ready SE 963 DDC Reading Done SE 964 DDC Buffer Half Full SE 965 DDC Buffer Full SE 966 DDC Reading overflow SE EE error event SE status event SYS system error event NOTE SCPI confirmed messages are described in Volume 2 Command Reference of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Refer to the SYSTem ERRor command Example a a C 2 Example Programs Program examples All example
278. tion that should be reviewed before operating the instrument Figure 2 2 3 4 5 Model 2010 rear panel Hf QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONY WARNIN Gino INTERNAL OF ERATOR H F KeItHuey Mg U S A IEE 488 CHANGE IHEE ADDRESS 1000V FROM FRONT PANEL PEAK TRIGGER Lo ony Taso 60 PEAK RENGE INPUT 2M 40 6G ExT TRIG OPTION SLOT CAUTION Fo continue z A A E TYPE AND RATING 7 8 DIGITAL COMMON 2 1 EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT VOLTMETER COMPLETE OUTPUT Trigger Reading Reading Complete TTLHI TTLHI gt gt 2usec K gt 10usec TTLLO TILLO 7 8 Basic Measurements 2 7 Option slot An optional scanner card Model 2000 SCAN or 2001 TCSCAN installs in this slot Input connections INPUT HI and LO Used for making DC volts AC volts two wire resistance measurements and for connecting scanner card SENSE 94 WIRE Used with INPUT HI and LO to make four wire resistance measure HI and LO ments for connecting scanner card and RATIO measurements in conjunction with INPUT HI and LO TRIGGER LINK One eight pin micro DIN connector for sending and receiving trigger pulses among other instruments Use a trigger link cable or adapter such as Models 8501 1 8501 2 8502 8503 RS 232 Connector for RS 232 operation Use a straight through not null modem DB 9 shielded cable TEEE 488 Connector for IEEE 488 GPIB
279. to 999999 999 Specify timer interval in seconds Query TIMer Query programmed timer interval Description These commands are used to set the interval for the timer Note that the timer is in effect only if it is the selected control source SIGNal TRIGger SEQuence 1 SIGNal Bypass measure control source Description This action command is used to bypass the specified control source when you do not wish to wait for the programmed event Remember that the instrument must be waiting for the appropriate event when the command is sent Otherwise an error occurs and this command is ignored 5 76 SCPI Command Reference SAMPle Command SAMPle COUNt lt NRf gt Set sample count Parameter Query Description UNIT subsystem lt NRf gt 1 to 1024 COUNt Query the sample count This command specifies the sample count The sample count defines how many times operation loops around in the trigger model to perform a device action NOTE If sample count is gt l you cannot use the READ command if there are readings stored in the buffer The UNIT subsystem is used to configure and control the measurement units for TEMP ACV and DCV and is summarized in Table 5 11 TEMPerature command TEMPerature lt name gt UNIT TEMPerature lt name gt Specify TEMP units Parameters lt name gt C or CEL C temperature units F or FAR F temperature units K K temperature units Query TEMPerature Query temperature units
280. to OFF and SENSEIN to ON Note that the display will read VS for voltage on SENSE terminals 5 Press AUTO to toggle autoranging Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed with autoranging If you want manual ranging use RANGE A and keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected voltages p NOTE Only 100mV IV and 10V ranges are available in either AUTO or manual ranging 6 Connect test leads to the source CAUTION D o not apply more than 350V peak to the SENSE terminals or instrument damage may occur 7 Observe the display If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until an on scale reading is displayed or press AUTO for autoranging Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 8 Take readings from the display Using ratio with the relative function The relative rel function is normally used to null offsets or to subtract a baseline reading from present and future readings See Relative in Section 3 for complete details When relative is used with the ratio mode the instrument calculates the ratio reading as follows Measure Input Ratio Measure Input Rel Value Sense Input For example assume the following Measure Input 5V Sense Input 2V Rel Value 1V The ratio value is Ratio 5 2 1 1 5 2 22 Basic Measurements Measuring current The Model 2010 can make DCI measurements from 10nA to 3A and ACI measurements from 1pA to 3A RMS
281. ts are the settings the instrument assumes when it is turned on The Model 2010 offers two choices for the settings factory and user The power on default will be the last configuration you saved The SAVE and SETUP keys select the two choices of power on defaults To save present configuration as user settings 1 Configure the instrument as desired for USER default 2 Press SHIFT then SAVE 3 Use the A and keys to select YES or NO 4 Press ENTER To restore factory or user settings 1 Press SHIFT then SETUP 2 Use the A and W keys to select FACTory or USER 3 Press ENTER Since the basic measurement procedures in this manual assume the factory defaults reset the instrument to the factory settings when following step by step procedures Table 2 2 lists the factory default settings Basic Measurements Table 2 2 Factory defaults Setting Factory default Autozero On Buffer No effect Continuity Beeper On Digits 4 Rate Fast 0 1 PLC Threshold 109 Current AC and DC Digits AC 5 Digits DC T2 Filter On Count 10 Mode Moving average Range Auto Relative Off Value 0 0 Rate AC Medium Rate DC Medium 1 PLC Diode test Digits 6 Range ImA Rate Medium 1 PLC Frequency and Period Digits 6 Range 10V Relative Off Value 0 0 Rate Slow 1 sec Function DCV GPIB No effect Address 16 at factory Language SCPI at factory Key click On Limits Off Beeper Never High limit 1 1 Low limit 1 1 High limi
282. ure in K DEFault 23 C 73 4 F 296K MINimum 0 C 32 F 273K MAXimum 50 C 122 F 323K Query SIMulated Query simulated reference SIMulated DEFault Query default RST reference SIMulated MINimum Query lowest allowable reference SIMulated MAXimum Query largest allowable reference SCPI Command Reference 5 51 Description This command is used to specify the simulated reference temperature The temperature value depends on which temperature scale is presently selected C F or K Typically 0 or 23 C is used as the simulated reference temperature REAL TCOefficient lt n gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction 1 REAL TCOefficient lt n gt Parameters lt n gt 0 09999 to 0 09999 Specify temperature coefficient DEFault 0 00020 temperature coefficient MINimum 0 09999 temperature coefficient MAXimum 0 09999 temperature coefficient Query TCOefficient Query temperature coefficient TC TCOefficient DEFault Query RST default TC TCOefficient MINimum Query lowest allowable TC TCOefficient MAXimum Query largest allowable TC Description This command is used to specify the temperature coefficient TC of the real temperature reference junction TC is specified in C volt and is not affected by the UNIT TEMPerature command sREAL OFFSet lt n gt SENSe 1 TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction 1 REAL OFFSet lt n gt Parameters lt n gt 0 09999 to 0 09999 Specify voltage offset at 0 C DE
283. ure panels or switching card When fuses are used in a product replace with same type and rating for continued protection against fire hazard Chassis connections must only be used as shield connections for measuring circuits NOT as safety earth ground connections If you are using a test fixture keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Safe operation requires the use of a lid interlock Ifa screw is present connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recommended in the user documentation The uN symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on an instrument shows that it can source or measure 1000 volts or more including the combined effect of normal and common mode voltages Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The Al symbol indicates a connection terminal to the equipment frame The WARNING heading in a manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading in a manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Instrumentation and accessories shall not be connected to humans Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables To maintain protection from electric shock
284. urement function the value is the same for all ranges For example if 50V is set as a rel value on the 100V range the rel is also 50V on the 1000V 10V 1V and 100mV ranges NOTE When a rel value is larger than the range selected the display is formatted to maximum resolution and range information is lost Thus when you perform a zero correction for DCV Q2 and Q4 measurements by enabling REL the displayed offset becomes the reference value Subtracting the offset from the actual input zeroes the display as follows Actual Input Reference Displayed Reading A rel value can be as large as the highest range Selecting a range that cannot accommodate the rel value does not cause an overflow condition but it also does not increase the maximum allowable input for that range For example on the 10V range the Model 2010 still overflows for a 12V input To set a rel relative value press REL key when the display shows the value you want as the relative value The REL annunciator turns on Pressing REL a second time disables rel You can input a REL value manually using the mX b function Set M for 1 and B for any value See Section 2 for more information on the mX b function Digits The display resolution of a Model 2010 reading depends on the DIGITS setting It has no effect on the remote reading format The number of displayed digits does not affect accuracy or speed Those parameters are controlled by the RATE setting Perf
285. urements from 10nV to 1000V and ACV measurements from 0 1pV to 750V RMS LOOOV peak Connections Assuming factory default conditions the basic procedure is 1 Connect test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals Either the front or rear inputs can be used place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position 2 Select the measurement function by pressing DCV or ACV 3 Pressing AUTO toggles autoranging Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed with autoranging If you want manual ranging use the RANGE A and W keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected voltage 4 Connect test leads to the source as shown in Figure 2 4 WARNING Maximum common mode voltage voltage between LO and chassis ground is 500V peak Exceeding this value may cause a shock hazard CAUTION Do not apply more than 1000V peak to the input or instrument damage may occur The voltage limit is subject to the 8 x 10 V Hz product 5 Observe the display If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until an on scale reading is displayed or press AUTO for autoranging Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 6 Take readings from the display Basic Measurements 2 17 Figure 2 4 Model 2010 DC and AC voltage measurements ESSRSSSSESERET DC Voltage Source e 22 aa aaa 00000000E CSEE Input Resistance 10MQ on 1000V and 100V ranges gt 10GQ on 10V 1V and 100mV ranges C
286. use the reference junction on a thermocouple switching card Typical reference junction temperatures are 0 C and 23 C In order to keep the reference calculations updated and accurate Channel 1 needs to be read periodically To assign a value to a parameter use the A and V keys to scroll to the desired parameter Select the key and use the A and W keys to scroll through and choose the preferred value Select the ENTER key to save your changes USER RTD Type Alpha Beta Delta and RZero values for the USER RTD type cannot be set from the front panel These values can only be set remotely from the GPIB bus or the RS 232 Interface After selecting USER use the following commands to set the RTD factors SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD ALPHa lt NRf gt Specify alpha value 0 to 0 01 SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD BETA lt NRf gt Specify beta value 0 to 1 00 SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD DELTa lt NRf gt Specify delta value 0 to 5 00 SENSe 1 TEMPerature FRTD RZERo lt NRf gt Specify resistance at 0 C 0 to 10000 NOTE For details on these commands see FRTD commands in the SENSe Subsystem Section 5 Model 2010 math operations are divided into four categories e mX b and percent dBm and dB calculations e Statistics of buffered readings Limit testing Basic Measurements 2 33 The first two categories are discussed in the following paragraphs Buffered reading statistics and reading limit testing are describe
287. vent Status Register sets If a query error QYE occurs bit B2 of the Standard Event Status Register sets Since both of these events are unmasked enabled the occurrence of any of them causes the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register to set Read the Standard Event Status Register using the ESE query command Event PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC ishti 128 64 32 16 8 4 1 Decimal Weighting 37 26 25 24 23 a 2 Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Note Bits B8 through B15 are not shown since they are not used Value 1 Enable Standard Event Events PON Power On 0 Disable Mask Standard Event URQ User Request CME Command Error EXE Execution Error DDE Device Dependent Error QYE Query Error OPC Operation Complete ESR Event Status Register Query Read the standard event status register and clear it Description Use this command to acquire the value in decimal of the Standard Event Register see Figure 4 14 The binary equivalent of the returned decimal value determines which bits in the register are set The register is cleared on power up or when CLS is sent A set bit in this register indicates that a particular event has occurred For example for an acquired decimal value of 48 the binary equivalent is 00110000 From this binary value bits B4 and B5 of the Standard Event Status Register are set These bits indicate th
288. verview E 7 Uniline commands ATN IFC and REN are asserted only by the controller SRQ is asserted by an external device EOI may be asserted either by the controller or other devices depending on the direction of data transfer The following is a description of each command Each command is sent by setting the corresponding bus line true REN Remote Enable REN is sent to set up instruments on the bus for remote operation When REN is true devices will be removed from the local mode Depending on device configuration all front panel controls except the LOCAL button if the device is so equipped may be locked out when REN is true Generally REN should be sent before attempting to program instruments over the bus EOI End or Identify EOI is used to positively identify the last byte in a multi byte transfer sequence thus allowing data words of various lengths to be transmitted easily IFC Interface Clear IFC is used to clear the interface and return all devices to the talker and listener idle states ATN Attention The controller sends ATN while transmitting addresses or multiline commands SRQ Service Request SRQ is asserted by a device when it requires service from a controller Universal multiline commands Universal commands are those multiline commands that require no addressing All devices equipped to implement such commands will do so simultaneously when the commands are transmitted As with all
289. width SCPI Command Reference 5 11 Table 5 6 cont SENSe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter SENSe 1 CURRent DC Path to configure DC current y NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate line cycles 0 01 to 10 1 y NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate y RANGe Path to configure measurement range y UPPer lt n gt Select range 0 to 3 1 3 y UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO Query auto range y REFerence lt n gt Specify reference 3 1 to 3 1 0 V STATe lt b gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe Query state of reference y ACQuire Use input signal as reference REFerence Query reference value V DIGits lt n gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 8 8 DIGits Query resolution AVERage Path to configure and control the filter TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note TCONtrol Query filter type COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt Query filter count STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter OFF STATe Query state of digital filter 5 12 SCPI Command Reference Table 5 6 cont SENSe command summary Command Description Default SCPI parameter VOLTage AC Path to configure AC voltage y NPLCycles lt n gt Set integration rate line cycles 0 01 to 10 1 y NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate y
290. wire resistance PERiod Period FREQuency Frequency TEMPerature Temperature DIODe Diode testing CONTinuity Continuity test Query CONFigure Query the selected function Description Program FETCh command FETCh Description SCPI Command Reference 5 3 This command configures the instrument for subsequent measurements on the specified function This command places the instrument in a one shot measurement mode You can then use the READ command to trigger a measurement and acquire a reading see READ When this command is sent the Model 2010 will be configured as follows The function specified by this command is selected All controls related to the selected function are defaulted to the RST values Continuous initiation is disabled INITiate CONTinuous OFF The control source of the Trigger Model is set to Immediate The count values of the Trigger Model are set to one The delay of the Trigger Model is set to zero The Model 2010 is placed in the idle state All math calculations are disabled Buffer operation is disabled A storage operation presently in process will be aborted Autozero is set to the RST default value All operations associated with switching cards scanning are disabled This command is automatically asserted when the MEASure command is sent PRINT 1 output 16 conf volt dc Perform CONFigure operations This command requests the latest post processed r
291. with the decimal equivalent of the binary value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of the bits in the register This register is cleared on power up This register is used as a mask for the Standard Event Register When a standard event is masked the occurrence of that event will not set the Event Summary Bit ESB in the Status Byte Register Conversely when a standard event is unmasked enabled the occurrence of that event sets the ESB bit For information on the Standard Event Register and descriptions of the standard event bits see the following section A cleared bit 0 in the enabled register prevents masks the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register from setting when the corresponding standard event occurs A set bit 1 in the enable register allows enables the ESB bit to set when the corresponding standard event occurs 4 36 Remote Operation Figure 4 13 Standard event enable Bit Position B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO register The Standard Event Enable Register is shown in Figure 4 13 and includes the decimal weight of each bit The sum of the decimal weights of the bits that you wish to be set is the parameter value that is sent with the ESE command For example to set the CME and QYE bits of the Standard Event Enable Register send the following command ESE 36 Where CME bit B5 Decimal 32 QYE bit B2 Decimal 4 lt NRf gt 36 If a command error CME occurs bit B5 of the Standard E
292. y reading conversion the data string sent over the bus contains the elements specified by the ELEMents command The specified elements are sent in a particular order The ASCII data format is in a direct readable form for the operator Most BASIC languages easily convert ASCII mantissa and exponent to other formats However some speed is compromised to accommodate the conversion Figure 5 1 shows the ASCII format that includes all the data elements Reading Channel Number 1 23456789E 00VDC OINTCHAN Mantissa Exponent Units INTCHAN Internal Channel EXTCHAN External Channel Units VDC DC Volts VAC AC Volts ADC DC Current AAC AC Current OHM 2 wire Resistance OHM4W 4 wire Resistance HZ Frequency C Temperature in C F Temperature in F K Temperature in K 0 No channel 1 to 80 Channel Number An overflow reading is displayed as 9 9E37 with no units SCPI Command Reference 5 29 SREal will select the binary IEEE754 single precision data format Figure 5 2 shows the normal byte order format for each data element For example if three valid elements are specified the data string for each reading conversion is made up of three 32 bit data blocks Note that the entire data string is preceded by a single 2 byte header that is the binary equivalent of an ASCII sign and 0 Figure 5 2 Header Byte 1 Byte

KEI 2010 User

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents